You are on page 1of 241

XP4 Plus

Microwave Radio System


User Manual

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002


Copyright © 2002 by Stratex Networks.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Stratex
Networks.

Printed in the United States of America.

Disclaimer
Stratex Networks makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically
disclaims any implied warranties or merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Further, Stratex
Networks reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the content
hereof without obligation of Stratex Networks to notify any person of such revision or changes.

Trademarks
All product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Stratex Networks Stratex Networks


170 Rose Orchard Way 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65
San Jose, California 95134-1358 #03-13 Techpoint
U.S.A. Singapore 569059
Telephone: (408) 943-0777 Telephone: + 65-6484-7780
Fax: (408) 944-1801 Fax: + 65-6484-7768
www.stratexnet.com

Stratex Networks
Regus
Central Boulevard
Blythe Valley Business Park
Solihull
West Midland
B90 8AG United Kingdom
Telephone: +44 1564 711084
Fax: +44 1564 711335

ii
Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
Preface
Scope ..................................................................................................................................................... i
Help Desk/Technical Support............................................................................................................... i
Comments on the Manual ........................................................................................................... ii
For Additional Information ................................................................................................................ iii
R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC........................................................................................................... iii
Health and Safety ............................................................................................................................... iii

1 Preparing for Installation


Unpacking the Equipment ............................................................................................................... 1-1
Verifying the System Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-3
Basic Components ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
Checking Equipment Part Number Labels ................................................................................ 1-4
Installation Kits ............................................................................................................................... 1-6
IDU/ODU .................................................................................................................................. 1-6
Remote Mount ODU ................................................................................................................. 1-6
Protected Systems—Indoor Units ............................................................................................. 1-7
E3 or DS-3 Protected Systems ............................................................................................ 1-8
16E1 Protected Systems...................................................................................................... 1-8
Protected Systems—Outdoor Units .......................................................................................... 1-9
Hot Standby and Frequency Diversity ................................................................................ 1-9
Space Diversity Protected Systems................................................................................... 1-10
Required Tools and Equipment ..................................................................................................... 1-10
Installing the Cable ........................................................................................................................ 1-12
Installation Guidelines ............................................................................................................. 1-12
Cable and Connector Specifications ....................................................................................... 1-12
Terminating the IDU/ODU Coaxial Cable .............................................................................. 1-14
Weatherproofing the Cable ..................................................................................................... 1-15
Using a Weatherproof Sleeve ........................................................................................... 1-15
Using Weatherproof Tape ................................................................................................. 1-18
Installing the Antenna .................................................................................................................... 1-20
Grounding ...................................................................................................................................... 1-21

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 iii


Contents

Grounding the IDU ................................................................................................................. 1-22


Grounding the ODU ............................................................................................................... 1-24

2 Installing the XP4 Plus


Installing a Non-protected System .................................................................................................. 2-1
Installing a Non-protected ODU ............................................................................................... 2-1
Installing a Direct-Mount ODU ................................................................................................ 2-1
Installing a Remote ODU ......................................................................................................... 2-4
Installing a Non-protected IDU ................................................................................................ 2-5
Installing an MSU (16E1 only) ................................................................................................. 2-9
Installing a Protected System ........................................................................................................ 2-13
Installing a Protected ODU ..................................................................................................... 2-13
Mounting to One Antenna with Direct Mount
Coupler/Splitter ............................................................................................................... 2-14
Installing the Direct-Mount Coupler to the Antenna........................................................ 2-15
Electrical Configuration ................................................................................................... 2-17
Mounting to One Antenna with Remote Mounts ................................................................... 2-18
Attaching the Remote Mount ........................................................................................... 2-18
Site Installation of Remote Mount Coupler...................................................................... 2-19
Mounting Dual ODUs to a Single Antenna with
‘T-Style’ Mount ............................................................................................................... 2-21
Electrical Configuration ................................................................................................... 2-22
Mounting to Two Antennas .................................................................................................... 2-22
Installing a Protected IDU ...................................................................................................... 2-24

3 Commissioning the XP4 Plus


Commissioning a Non-protected Terminal ..................................................................................... 3-1
Required Tools .......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 3-2
Checking Connections .............................................................................................................. 3-2
Applying Power ........................................................................................................................ 3-4
Initial Power-up .................................................................................................................. 3-4
Subsequent Power-up ......................................................................................................... 3-5
Setting XP4 Parameters ............................................................................................................ 3-5
Commissioning a Protected Terminal ............................................................................................. 3-7
Selecting a Protection Mode ..................................................................................................... 3-7
Protection Mode Options .......................................................................................................... 3-8
Hot Standby (HSB)............................................................................................................. 3-8
Frequency Diversity ........................................................................................................... 3-9
Dual Link (8x Systems)...................................................................................................... 3-9
Space Diversity (E3, 16E1, and DS-3 Systems)................................................................. 3-9
Protection Switch LED Summary ............................................................................................ 3-9
Commissioning in Hot Standby Protection Mode .................................................................. 3-10
Changing the Link ID Code for a Protected System ........................................................ 3-11
Commissioning in Frequency Diversity Mode ....................................................................... 3-11
Commissioning in Dual Link Protection Mode
(8x only) .......................................................................................................................... 3-13

iv XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Contents

Commissioning in Space Diversity Mode


(E3, DS-3 and 16E1 systems only) .................................................................................. 3-14
Operations ...................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Switching Conditions for 2x/4x/8x Protected
Systems ............................................................................................................................ 3-15
Switching Conditions for E3, DS-3, and 16E1 Systems ......................................................... 3-16
Aligning Antennas ......................................................................................................................... 3-17
Aligning with the IDU ............................................................................................................. 3-17
Aligning with the ODU ........................................................................................................... 3-17
AGC Voltage Optimization ..................................................................................................... 3-18

4 Configuring the XP4 Plus


Using LinkView .............................................................................................................................. 4-2
Using the Appropriate Cable with LinkView ........................................................................... 4-5
Using the XP4 IDU Front Panel ...................................................................................................... 4-5
Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Control Keys ............................................................................................................................. 4-7
Front-Panel Display ................................................................................................................... 4-8
User Information LEDs ............................................................................................................. 4-8
Logging In to the IDU Keypad ........................................................................................................ 4-9
Logging In for the First Time .................................................................................................... 4-9
Viewing and Changing Current Settings ......................................................................................... 4-9
Viewing the RSL/Alarm .......................................................................................................... 4-10
Viewing BER and Configuring Traffic (BER) Capacity ........................................................ 4-11
Configuring the Transmit Frequency (Tx FREQ) ................................................................... 4-13
Configuring the Transmit Power (Tx PWR) ........................................................................... 4-15
Configuring the Link ID Code ................................................................................................ 4-15
Viewing/Changing Tributary Configurations
(TRIB CFG) ..................................................................................................................... 4-16
Logging Out ................................................................................................................................... 4-18

5 Configuring the Network Management Interface Option


Installing the NMI Option Card ...................................................................................................... 5-2
Configuring the NMI Option ........................................................................................................... 5-4
NMI Connection ........................................................................................................................ 5-9
SNMP Interface Cables ........................................................................................................... 5-10
RJ-45 Ethernet Unshielded Straight Interface Cable ....................................................... 5-10
RJ-45 Ethernet Unshielded Crossover Interface Cable..................................................... 5-10
VT100 Interface Cable (DB9 Female).............................................................................. 5-11
Ethernet Port ..................................................................................................................... 5-11
RS232 SLIP/PPP Interface Cable ..................................................................................... 5-12
RS422 SLIP/PPP Interface Cable ..................................................................................... 5-13
Serial-to-Serial Cable ........................................................................................................ 5-13

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 v


Contents

6 Installing and Configuring Other Options/Accessories


Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) .................................................................................. 6-1
Activating ATPC ...................................................................................................................... 6-2
De-Activating ATPC ................................................................................................................ 6-2
The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) .................................................................................................. 6-2
Installing the EIU ...................................................................................................................... 6-3
Installation Configurations ................................................................................................. 6-5
Auxiliary Data Channels ................................................................................................................. 6-7
Network Order Wire ....................................................................................................................... 6-9
Installing the Network Order Wire ........................................................................................... 6-9
Configuring the Network Order Wire ..................................................................................... 6-11
Engineering Order Wire (EOW) Handset ..................................................................................... 6-12
External Alarm Relays .................................................................................................................. 6-13
Configuring External Alarms ................................................................................................. 6-13

7 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System


Interpreting Alarm Messages .......................................................................................................... 7-1
Troubleshooting Quick Reference .................................................................................................. 7-3
Discrete Alarm Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 7-6
Determining if Cable Is Open or Shorted ................................................................................. 7-8
Troubleshooting Using the Front Panel .......................................................................................... 7-9
Using Loopbacks .......................................................................................................................... 7-10
Activating Loopbacks ............................................................................................................. 7-11
ODU Loopbacks ..................................................................................................................... 7-12
Local ODU Analog Loopback.......................................................................................... 7-12
Local ODU Digital Loopback ......................................................................................... 7-14
Local ODU RF Loopback (option for 23, 38 GHz radios).............................................. 7-16
IDU Loopbacks ....................................................................................................................... 7-18
Local IDU Digital Loopback............................................................................................ 7-18
Local IDU E3/DS-3 Loopback ........................................................................................ 7-19
Activating Tributary Loopbacks ............................................................................................. 7-20
Local Tributary Loopback................................................................................................ 7-22
Remote Tributary Loopback............................................................................................. 7-24
Running Tributary Loopbacks on Protected Systems ............................................................ 7-26
Force Switching a Protected System ................................................................................ 7-26
Activating SU Remote Loopbacks ......................................................................................... 7-26
Diagnostic Information Provided ..................................................................................... 7-26
Activating MSU Loopbacks ................................................................................................... 7-28
Remote MSU E1 Loopback............................................................................................. 7-28
Local MSU E3 Loopback ................................................................................................. 7-30
Common Problems ....................................................................................................................... 7-31
Technical Support ......................................................................................................................... 7-33
Faulty Equipment .......................................................................................................................... 7-34
Maintaining the XP4 Plus ............................................................................................................. 7-34
Checking Cables and Grounding Connections ............................................................................. 7-34
Monitoring Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................. 7-34

vi XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Contents

8 XP4 Plus System Description


Features ............................................................................................................................................ 8-1
Architecture ..................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Possible Configurations ............................................................................................................. 8-4
XP4 Plus Non-protected Configurations............................................................................. 8-4
XP4 Plus Protected Configurations..................................................................................... 8-6
XP4 Plus IDU (Indoor unit) ............................................................................................................ 8-7
XP4 Plus IDU Features ............................................................................................................. 8-8
IDU Configurations ................................................................................................................... 8-9
XP4 Plus ODU (Outdoor Unit) ..................................................................................................... 8-12
Features ................................................................................................................................... 8-12
Architecture ............................................................................................................................. 8-13
Comparing the XP4 Plus and XP4 ODUs ............................................................................... 8-17
System Configuration .................................................................................................................... 8-18
Front Panel Controls ................................................................................................................ 8-18
LinkView Maintenance Tool .................................................................................................. 8-19
Protected System ........................................................................................................................... 8-20
IDU/ODU Protected Configurations ....................................................................................... 8-22
Dual ODU/Single Antenna Configuration........................................................................ 8-23
Dual ODU/Dual Antenna Configuration .......................................................................... 8-24
Protection Switch .................................................................................................................... 8-25
Network Management (NMI) Card Option ................................................................................... 8-25
Fault Monitoring and Management ......................................................................................... 8-26
Radio and Network Management Configuration .................................................................... 8-26
Performance Monitoring and Management ............................................................................. 8-27
Security Management .............................................................................................................. 8-27
Code Download via TFTP ....................................................................................................... 8-28
Dial-out Capability .................................................................................................................. 8-28
Dial-in Capability .................................................................................................................... 8-28
Auxiliary Data Channels Option ................................................................................................... 8-28
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Option .................................................................... 8-28
The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) ................................................................................................. 8-29
The Network Order Wire ............................................................................................................... 8-30
Engineering Order Wire (EOW) Handset ..................................................................................... 8-31
Alarm Relays ................................................................................................................................. 8-32

A XP4 Plus Technical Specifications


XP4 Plus DS-1/DS-3 Specifications .............................................................................................. A-1
XP4 Plus E1/E3 Specifications ...................................................................................................... A-5

B Part Number Methodology


ODU Part Numbers ........................................................................................................................ B-1
IDU Part Numbers .......................................................................................................................... B-3

C R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC


Intended Use of Equipment for European Union ........................................................................... C-1

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 vii


Contents

Glossary
Index

viii XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Figures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
Figure 1-1. XP4 Plus Shipping Container ............................................................................................. 1-1
Figure 1-2. Shipping Container Contents .............................................................................................. 1-2
Figure 1-3. IDU Part Number Labels ................................................................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-4. ODU Part Number Label .................................................................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-5. Weatherproof Sleeve Kit................................................................................................... 1-15
Figure 1-6. Weatherproofing the Cable Connection............................................................................ 1-19
Figure 1-7. Installation Site Grounding ............................................................................................... 1-21
Figure 1-8. Frame Grounding the IDU ................................................................................................ 1-22
Figure 1-9. Station (Master) Ground Bar............................................................................................. 1-23
Figure 1-10. Frame Grounding the ODU............................................................................................... 1-24
Figure 2-1. Direct-mount ODU with Antenna....................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2. ODU Polarization Indicator ................................................................................................ 2-2
Figure 2-3. ODU Installation ................................................................................................................. 2-3
Figure 2-4. Remote Mount ODU with Antenna .................................................................................... 2-4
Figure 2-5. IDU Installed in a Rack....................................................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-6. 90o N-Type Adapter Example ............................................................................................ 2-6
Figure 2-7. XP4 Plus 2x/4x IDU Connectors ........................................................................................ 2-7
Figure 2-8. XP4 Plus 4x/8x IDU Connectors ....................................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-9. XP4 Plus E3 and DS-3 IDU Connectors............................................................................. 2-7
Figure 2-10. IDU Power Connector Pinout ............................................................................................. 2-8
Figure 2-11. XP4 Plus 16E1 Connectors ................................................................................................ 2-9
Figure 2-15. Coupler Assembly............................................................................................................. 2-15
Figure 2-16. IDUs Installed in a Rack ................................................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2-17. Cable Connections for Front Access 2x/4x and
4x/8x Protected Systems 2-27
Figure 2-18. Cable Connections for E3 and DS-3 Protected Systems................................................... 2-27
Figure 2-19. Cable Connections for 16E1 Protected Systems............................................................... 2-28
Figure 2-20. IDU Power Connector Pinout ........................................................................................... 2-29
Figure 3-1. 2x/4x IDU Front Panel Connectors..................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3-2. 4x/8x IDU Front Panel Connectors..................................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3-3. E3 and DS-3 IDU Front Panel Connectors ......................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3-4. 16E1 IDU/MSU Front Panel Connectors............................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3-5. IDU Power Connector......................................................................................................... 3-4
PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 ix
Figures

Figure 3-6. E3/DS-3/16E1 SU/MSU Components ............................................................................... 3-7


Figure 3-7. 2x/4x/8x Protection Switch Components ........................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3-8. ODU Protection Configuration using Dual Antennas ...................................................... 3-14
Figure 4-1. XP4 Plus Speedkeys and LEDs .......................................................................................... 4-6
Figure 4-2. Alarm LEDs........................................................................................................................ 4-6
Figure 4-3. Control Keys....................................................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-4. Front-Panel Display............................................................................................................ 4-8
Figure 5-1. Connection for Front-Access NMIs ................................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-2. SNMP Connection for Rear-Access NMI .......................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-3. VT100 RJ-45 to DB9 Adapter............................................................................................ 5-5
Figure 5-4. NMI Connection—Front-Panel Access.............................................................................. 5-9
Figure 5-5. NMI Panels for Rear & Front Access Modules.................................................................. 5-9
Figure 6-1. Ethernet Interface Unit Shelf (EIU) Assembly .................................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-2. Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) Non-protected Configuration ............................................. 6-6
Figure 6-3. Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) Protected Configuration ..................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-7. Network Order Wire........................................................................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-8. Network Order Wire Configuration ................................................................................. 6-10
Figure 6-9. Non-protected (1+0) Daisy Chain Configuration............................................................. 6-10
Figure 6-10. Protected (1+1) Daisy Chain Link Configuration ............................................................ 6-11
Figure 6-11. EOW Configuration.......................................................................................................... 6-12
Figure 7-1. Alarm LEDs........................................................................................................................ 7-2
Figure 7-2. Alarm Combination Sample ............................................................................................... 7-2
Figure 7-3. ODU Analog Loopback Signal Path ................................................................................ 7-12
Figure 7-4. ODU Analog Loopback.................................................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-5. ODU Digital Loopback Signal Path ................................................................................. 7-14
Figure 7-6. ODU Digital Loopback .................................................................................................... 7-15
Figure 7-7. ODU RF Loopback Signal Path ....................................................................................... 7-16
Figure 7-8. RF Loopback .................................................................................................................... 7-17
Figure 7-9. IDU Loopback Signal Path............................................................................................... 7-18
Figure 7-10. IDU Digital Loopback ...................................................................................................... 7-19
Figure 7-11. Local Tributary Loopback Signal Path............................................................................. 7-22
Figure 7-12. Local Tributary Loopback................................................................................................ 7-23
Figure 7-13. Remote Tributary Loopback Signal Path ......................................................................... 7-24
Figure 7-14. Remote Tributary Loopback............................................................................................. 7-25
Figure 7-15. Remote SU E3/DS-3 Loopback Signal Path .................................................................... 7-27
Figure 7-16. Remote MSU E1 Loopback Signal Path .......................................................................... 7-29
Figure 7-17. Local MSU E3 Loopback Signal Path.............................................................................. 7-30
Figure 8-1. XP4 Plus Series Microwave Radio System........................................................................ 8-2
Figure 8-2. XP4 Plus Frequency Bands and Data Rates ....................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8-3. Non-protected Configuration for 2x/4xE1 and 4x/8x E1/DS-1 Capacities........................ 8-4
Figure 8-4. Non-protected Configuration for E3 and DS-3
Capacities 8-5
Figure 8-5. Non-protected Configuration for 16xE1 Capacity ............................................................. 8-5
Figure 8-6. Protected Configuration for 2x/4xE1 and 4x/8x
E1/DS-1 Capacities 8-6
Figure 8-7. Protected Configuration for E3 and DS-3 Capacities......................................................... 8-6
Figure 8-8. Protected Configuration for 16xE1 Capacity ..................................................................... 8-7
Figure 8-9. Balanced / Unbalanced 2x/4x IDU..................................................................................... 8-9

x XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Figures

Figure 8-10. Balanced / Unbalanced 4x/8x E1 or DS-1 IDU .................................................................. 8-9


Figure 8-11. Unbalanced E3 or DS-3 IDU .............................................................................................. 8-9
Figure 8-12. Balanced/ Unbalanced 16xE1 IDU/MSU ......................................................................... 8-10
Figure 8-13. XP4 Plus IDU Block Diagrams ........................................................................................ 8-11
Figure 8-14. XP4 Plus ODU .................................................................................................................. 8-12
Figure 8-15. 2/4/8x XP4 Plus Cable Signals ......................................................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-16. E3/16xE1 XP4 Plus Cable Signals.................................................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-17. DS-3 XP4 Plus Cable Signals ........................................................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-18. XP4 Plus ODU Block Diagram ........................................................................................ 8-16
Figure 8-19. IDU Speed Keys................................................................................................................ 8-18
Figure 8-20. XP4 Plus Universal Radio Architecture............................................................................ 8-19
Figure 8-21. LinkView Main Screen ..................................................................................................... 8-20
Figure 8-22. Protected Configuration .................................................................................................... 8-21
Figure 8-23. 4x/8xE1 IDUs in Protected Configuration........................................................................ 8-22
Figure 8-24. E3 or DS-3 IDUs in Protected Configuration ................................................................... 8-23
Figure 8-25. Figure 17. 16xE1 System in Protected Configuration ...................................................... 8-23
Figure 8-26. Dual ODU/Single Antenna Protection Configuration ...................................................... 8-24
Figure 8-27. Dual ODU/Dual Antenna Protection Configuration ......................................................... 8-24
Figure 8-28. Radio Link with EOW Connection................................................................................... 8-31
Figure 8-29. Alarm Relays Connector ................................................................................................... 8-32

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 xi


Figures

xii XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
Table 1-1. Basic Components of a Non-protected (1+0) XP4 Plus Link ........................................... 1-3
Table 1-2. Basic Components of a Protected (1+1) XP4 Plus Link ................................................... 1-4
Table 1-3. IDU Installation Kit ........................................................................................................... 1-6
Table 1-4. ODU Installation Kit.......................................................................................................... 1-6
Table 1-6. 2x/4x Protection Switch Unit Installation Kit.................................................................... 1-7
Table 1-7. 4x/8x Protection Switch Unit Installation Kit.................................................................... 1-7
Table 1-5. Remote Mount Installation Kit .......................................................................................... 1-7
Table 1-8. E3 or DS-3 Protection Switch Unit Installation Kit........................................................... 1-8
Table 1-9. 16E1 Mux/Switching Unit Installation Kit ........................................................................ 1-8
Table 1-10. Dual ODU Direct-Mount Coupler/Splitter Installation Kit (mounts 2 ODUs).................. 1-9
Table 1-11. Dual ODU Remote Mount Coupler/Splitter Installation Kit (mounts 2 ODUs)............... 1-9
Table 1-12. ODU Indoor Rack Mount Coupler Installation Kit ......................................................... 1-10
Table 1-13. Required Installation Equipment .................................................................................... 1-11
Table 1-14. Number of Required Connectors ..................................................................................... 1-12
Table 1-15. Approved Cable and Connectors .................................................................................... 1-13
Table 1-16. Antenna Size and Gains (dB) .......................................................................................... 1-20
Table 2-1. Tributary Connections ....................................................................................................... 2-8
Table 2-2. Coupler Losses, Typical................................................................................................... 2-17
Table 2-3. Torque Table .................................................................................................................... 2-18
Table 2-4. IDU Tributary DB25 Pinout ........................................................................................... 2-25
Table 3-1. Setting the Parameters of the XP4 Plus ............................................................................. 3-5
Table 3-3. E3, DS-3, and 16E1 Alarms and Switching Functions .................................................... 3-16
Table 3-2. 2x/4x/8x Alarms and Switching Functions...................................................................... 3-16
Table 3-4. BNC Voltage and RSL Relationship ............................................................................... 3-18
Table 4-1. LinkView vs. Front-Panel Access...................................................................................... 4-1
Table 4-2. LinkView Access Levels and Available Features.............................................................. 4-3
Table 4-3. Alarm LED Indicators........................................................................................................ 4-7
Table 4-4. Alarms and Display Codes............................................................................................... 4-10
Table 5-1. Ethernet Port (10BT or UTP RJ-45) ................................................................................ 5-7
Table 5-2. Serial Management Ports (MGMT1 and MGMT2)........................................................... 5-7
Table 5-3. XP4 (Radio) Management Port.......................................................................................... 5-8
Table 5-4. RJ-45 Ethernet Straight Cable Pinout .............................................................................. 5-10
Table 5-5. RJ-45 Ethernet Crossover Cable Pinout........................................................................... 5-10
PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 xiii
Tables

Table 5-6. VT100 Interface Cable DB9 Female Connector ............................................................. 5-11
Table 5-7. RS232 SLIP/PPP DB9, DB25 Female Connector .......................................................... 5-12
Table 5-8. RS422 Interface Cable DB25 Female Connector............................................................ 5-13
Table 5-9. RJ-45 Ethernet Straight Cable Pinout.............................................................................. 5-13
Table 6-1. Self-Test LED Colors ....................................................................................................... 6-5
Table 6-2. Unbalanced RS232 DB9 Pinout ........................................................................................ 6-7
Table 6-3. Balanced RS422 DB9 Pinout ............................................................................................ 6-8
Table 6-4. IDU Alarm Relays DB 15 PINs ..................................................................................... 6-14
Table 7-1. XP4 Plus Troubleshooting Quick Reference .................................................................... 7-3
Table 7-2. Discrete Alarms ................................................................................................................ 7-6
Table 7-3. LED Alarms for XP4 Plus Systems .................................................................................. 7-9
Table 7-4. Common Problems ......................................................................................................... 7-31
Table 8-1. Data Rates and Line Codes................................................................................................ 8-3
Table 8-2. Comparison between XP4 Plus and XP4 ODU............................................................... 8-17

xiv XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.

Scope
This manual supports the family of XP4 Plus radios. It is written for those who install,
commission, operate, and maintain the XP4 Plus Microwave Radio system.

Installation tasks include mechanical installation of the XP4 Plus system, connecting
external equipment to the XP4 Plus system, and configuring the system. Operation tasks
include configuring radio operating parameters, monitoring status, and maintaining the
system through troubleshooting and system repair procedures.

Help Desk/Technical Support


Stratex Networks’ global network of technical support help desks provides responsive
communication and timely solutions for customers’ product support issues. The help
desks are located in San Jose, CA; Hamilton, Scotland; Wellington, New Zealand; and
Clark, Philippines. These locations support Stratex Networks’ strategy of combining local
product and customer knowledge with worldwide expertise. The contact information for
each location is included on the following page.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 i


Preface

The technical support help desks answer telephone, fax, and e-mail technical queries from
customers relating to Stratex Networks’ products or services and support the following
activities and services:

• Escalation process
• Fault reporting and repair
• Customer Relationship Management System (DMCOne)
• Global Corrective Action System (GCAS)
• Status, information, and metrics reporting
• Quality measures
• Engineering support

Region Telephone Number Fax Number Contact Name/E-mail

The Americas 1 800 362 9283 1 408 944 1671 sj_techsupport@stratexnet.com


Stratex Networks or 1 408 944 1801
San Jose 1 408 943 0777

Europe, Middle East, +44 1698 717 230 +44 1698 717 217 dmcglasupport@stratexnet.com
Africa (EMEA)
Stratex Networks
Hamilton, Scotland UK

Asia Pacific +63 45 599 5192 +63 45 599 5196 dmcapsupport@stratexnet.com


Stratex Networks
Clark, Philippines

New Zealand +64 4 577 8800 +64 4 557 8924 dmcnzsupport@stratexnet.com


Stratex Networks
Wellington, New Zealand

Comments on the Manual


Please contact the technical support help desks at the numbers listed above with any
questions, comments, or suggestions regarding this manual.

ii XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


For Additional Information

For Additional Information


To order any of the following publications, contact your Stratex Networks Sales or Help
Desk representative at the numbers listed above.

For more information on . . . Refer to . . . Part Number

LinkView LinkView Manual for XP4 840-600400-001

XP4 Plus Management Information XP4 MIB Reference Guide 000-000079-SPC (2x/4x/8x)
Base (MIB) 000-000080-SPC (16x/E3/DS-3)

NMI/SNMP SNMP Interface User Manual 510-000011-003 (2x/4x/8x)


NMI Quickstart Guide 840-900210-001 (all)

R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC


For information regarding the R&TTE Directive and intended use table, refer to
Appendix C.

Health and Safety


Because Stratex Networks is extremely concerned about the safety of its radio equipment
during both deployment and operation, it adheres to the following common safety
practices. These practices ensure that the equipment meets relevant US national safety
standards as well as European standards, as outlined in IEC Publication 60950.

• Stray Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation – The radio equipment’s RF assemblies are
constructed to a very high mechanical standard.
• Protection from RF Burns – The equipment does not generate RF fields in enough
intensity to cause RF burns, however potential hazards include looking into or stand-
ing in front of the active antenna aperture while the equipment is operating. Looking
into the waveguide antenna port of the ODU is also very dangerous to the eyes when
the transmitter is on.
• Hazardous Materials – No hazardous materials are used in the construction of the
equipment and, therefore, no special handling/disposal procedures need to be fol-
lowed.
• Surface Temperatures – While surfaces of the equipment do become warm during
operation due to normal heat dissipation, the temperatures reached are not high enough
to be hazardous.
• Flammability – The equipment is designed and constructed to minimize the risk of
smoke and fumes under fire conditions.
• Lifting Equipment – Care should be taken when hoisting or lifting the ODU during
installation or maintenance.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 iii


Preface

• Safety Signs – It is not necessary to place any warning signs or other indications on
the equipment.
• Safety Warnings – When a particular practice or procedure poses implied or potential
harm to the user or to the radio equipment, a warning is included in this manual.
• Equipment Protrusions – The equipment has been ergonomically designed to be free
from unnecessary protrusions or sharp surfaces that may catch or otherwise cause
injury during handling.

iv XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


1
1

Preparing for Installation


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
This chapter covers pre-installation procedures for the XP4 Plus such as unpacking and
checking the equipment, installing the cables and antenna, and grounding the equipment.
For specific information about the XP4 Plus radio system, see “Chapter 8, XP4 Plus
System Description.”

Unpacking the Equipment


The equipment for one complete non-protected link is shipped in two boxes. Each box
contains one IDU and one ODU, which are identified by labels on the right side of the box
(see Figure 1-1).

Figure 1-1. XP4 Plus Shipping Container

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–1


Preparing for Installation

As shown in Figure 1-2, each of the boxes includes an IDU, an IDU installation kit, an
IDU Installation Guide, an ODU, and an ODU installation kit (which includes an
installation guide).

IDU ODU

IDU Install Guide(s)

Installation Kit Installation Kit

Figure 1-2. Shipping Container Contents

The tools required for unpacking the system equipment include:

• Utility knife
• Clean, flat working surface
Open the shipping containers, carefully remove the equipment, and place it on a clean, flat
working surface. Save the shipping and packing material in case the equipment has to be
returned.

Check that all of the components required for your system configuration have been
included in the shipment. See the following section, Verifying the System Configuration. If
there are discrepancies between the equipment expected and the equipment received,
contact your Customer Service representative (see Help Desk/Technical Support on page i
of the Preface for a list of contact numbers).

Inspect the equipment for any type of shipping damage. If any part of the shipment is
damaged, contact your Sales representative for repair or replacement instructions.

1–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Verifying the System Configuration

Verifying the System Configuration


After unpacking the equipment, check that the basic components for your particular
system configuration have been included in the shipment. See the Possible Configurations
section on page 8–4 for examples of both non-protected and protected configurations. To
check your specific configuration, see the next section, Checking Equipment Part Number 1
Labels.
Once the XP4 Plus is installed and powered up, also check that the configuration settings
are correct, including the ODU frequency band, T-R spacing, capacity, and IDU
configuration. See “Chapter 4, Configuring the XP4 Plus” for more information on
checking the configuration settings.

Basic Components
The number of XP4 Plus components you receive from Stratex Networks depends on
whether you have ordered a non-protected or a protected system. A protected system
includes an additional radio that serves as a backup for the first radio if data transmission
is interrupted for any reason. The following tables list the parts included for one complete
link for both non-protected and protected systems of various capacities.

Table 1-1. Basic Components of a Non-protected (1+0) XP4 Plus Link

2/4/8E1, 4/8DS-1, E3, and DS-3 Capacities

Transmit Low Terminal Transmit High Terminal

• 1 indoor unit (IDU) • 1 indoor unit (IDU)


• 1 “transmit low” outdoor RF unit (ODU) • 1 “transmit high” outdoor RF unit (ODU)
• 1 antenna with XP-type slip-fit interface • 1 antenna with XP-type slip-fit interface
• Cabling to connect the IDU and ODU* • Cabling to connect the IDU and ODU*

16E1 Capacity

Transmit Low Terminal Transmit High Terminal

• 1 E3 indoor unit (IDU) • 1 E3 indoor unit (IDU)


• 1 16E1 mux/switch unit (MSU) • 1 16E1 mux/switch unit (MSU)
• 1 E3 “transmit low” outdoor RF unit (ODU) • 1 E3 “transmit high” outdoor RF unit (ODU)
• 1 antenna with XP-type slip-fit interface • 1 antenna with XP-type slip-fit interface
• Cabling to connect the IDU and ODU* • Cabling to connect the IDU and ODU*

* Cables and connectors can be ordered through Stratex Networks, but are shipped sepa-
rately from other components.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–3


Preparing for Installation

Table 1-2. Basic Components of a Protected (1+1) XP4 Plus Link

2/4/8E1, 4/8DS-1, 1E3, and 1DS-3 Capacities

Transmit Low Terminal Transmit High Terminal

• 2 identical indoor units (IDUs) • 2 identical indoor units (IDUs)


• 1 protection switch unit (SU) • 1 protection switch unit (SU)
• 2 “transmit low” outdoor RF units (ODUs) • 2 “transmit high” outdoor RF units (ODUs)
• 1 dual ODU direct-mount coupler or splitter • 1 dual ODU direct-mount coupler or splitter
• 1 antenna with XP-type slip-fit interface • 1 antenna with XP-type slip-fit interface
• Cabling to connect the IDUs and ODUs* • Cabling to connect the IDUs and ODUs*

16E1 Capacity

Transmit Low Terminal Transmit High Terminal

• 2 E3 indoor units (IDUs) • 2 E3 indoor units (IDUs)


• 1 16E1 mux/switch unit (MSU) • 1 16E1 mux/switch unit (MSU)
• 2 E3 “transmit low” outdoor RF units (ODUs) • 2 E3 “transmit high” outdoor RF units (ODUs)
• 1 dual ODU direct-mount coupler or splitter • 1 dual ODU direct-mount coupler or splitter
• 1 antenna with XP-type slip-fit interfaces • 1 antenna with XP-type slip-fit interface
• Cabling to connect the IDU and ODU* • Cabling to connect the IDU and ODU*
* Cables and connectors can be ordered through Stratex Networks, but are shipped sepa-
rately from other components.

Checking Equipment Part Number Labels


To confirm the configuration of the XP4 components, refer to the part number labels
located on the back of the equipment. Each part number references a specific type of
equipment. Compare the part numbers and product descriptions against both the shipping
box labels and the equipment invoice. Ensure that the equipment part numbers, parts, and
ancillary equipment included in the shipment match what is specified on the packing list.

Figure 1-3 shows a sample of the part number label for an IDU without options and an
IDU with the SNMP option. It also shows the placement of the part number label for the
IDU protection switch. Figure 1-4 shows a sample of the part number label for the ODU.

1–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Verifying the System Configuration

IDU, No Options

1
PART #: 840-302025-111
IDU: DS3 UNBALANCED

IDU with SNMP


Option

PART #: 840-3000005-003 PART #: 840-302025-111


NETWORK MANAGEMENT IDU: DS3 UNBALANCED
INTERFACE OPTION CARD
S/W - X.X

IDU Protection PART #: 840-400105-001


Switch PROTECTION SWITCH
DS3 UNBALANCED

Figure 1-3. IDU Part Number Labels

POL
PART #: 840-202234-021
ODU: 24 GHz BAND / LOW
CAPACITY: DS3 PLUS
RANGE: 24.250 - 24.450 GHz
MINIMUM POWER: +17 dBm

Figure 1-4. ODU Part Number Label

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–5


Preparing for Installation

Installation Kits
Most of the materials needed for installation are supplied with the system in an installation
kit, however some additional tools and equipment may be required. (See the following
section, Required Cables, Connectors, and Tools.)

IDU/ODU
Table 1-3 lists the materials included in an IDU installation kit. Table 1-4 lists the
materials included in an ODU installation kit. The contents of each installation kit are
listed on the label affixed to the kit.

Table 1-3. IDU Installation Kit

Quantity Description

5 Phillips truss-head screws for mounting IDU in rack;


No. 10 (10-32)
5 Nylon washers
5 3.15A, slow-blow, 20mm spare fuses for IDU
1 DC Power Connector for IDU; Weidmuller 3-pin
1 Type N 90× angle connector for use with IDU in reduced
front access clearance environments
1 100 mm tiewrap for securing the power cables to the
3-pin Weidmuller DC power connector
1 1 radio installation guide

Table 1-4. ODU Installation Kit

Quantity Description

1 Weatherproof sleeve or tape (Innovaseal)


1 200 mm cable tie wrap
1 Nylon spacer
1 Installation instructions for cable connector
weatherproof sleeve

Remote Mount ODU


If your order includes a remote mounted ODU, you will receive the following additional
equipment:

• 1 single or dual ODU remote mount


• 1single or dual ODU remote mount installation kit, containing:

1–6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installation Kits

Table 1-5. Remote Mount Installation Kit

Quantity Description

2 Galvanized custom V-bolt


5 ½-13 hex nut for attaching item 1 to antenna mounting 1
assembly (incl. 1 spare)
5 ½” flat washer for item 2 (incl. 1 spare)

Additional items, available through Stratex Networks, include:

• Antenna waveguide adapter for antennas using XP-type interface


• Flex waveguide (includes hex screws and Allen wrench; the size of the screws and
wrench change according to the size of the flex waveguide)

Protected Systems—Indoor Units


The additional radio equipment you receive depends on the type of protected system you
are installing. If you are not certain, refer to the Protected System section on 8–20 for
descriptions of the possible protected configurations (modes).

In addition to the IDU radio equipment listed in Table 1-3, a protection switch unit (in
unbalanced or balanced configuration, per original Purchase Order) and an installation kit
is required to install a protected system. The type of kit depends on the protected
configuration for your system. Tables 1-6 and 1-7 include the parts lists for a 2x/4x and a
4x/8x configuration respectively.

Specific equipment is also required for a protected ODU. See Protected Systems—
Outdoor Units for a list of installation kits .

Table 1-6. 2x/4x Protection Switch Unit Installation Kit

Quantity Description

5 Phillips dome-head screws for mounting switch unit in rack;


No.10 (10-32) and No. 12 (12-24).
5 Washers
2 DB9 male-to-male cables
2 DB25 male-to-male cables

Table 1-7. 4x/8x Protection Switch Unit Installation Kit

Quantity Description

5 Phillips dome-head screw for mounting IDU in rack, No.10


(10-32) and No.12 (12-24).
5 Washers

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–7


Preparing for Installation

Table 1-7. 4x/8x Protection Switch Unit Installation Kit

Quantity Description

2 DB9 male-to-male cables


4 DB25 male-to-male cables

E3 or DS-3 Protected Systems


In addition to the ODU and IDU radio equipment listed in Tables 1-3 and 1-4, a protection
switch unit (SU) and installation kit is required (one per terminal) to install an E3 or DS-3
protected system. Table 1-8 includes the parts list for the E3/DS-3 configuration.

One dual ODU direct-mount coupler/splitter or dual ODU remote mount coupler/splitter
kit per terminal is also required. The parts list for each is included in Tables 1-10 and 1-11.
Each kit contains sufficient parts to mount two ID U s.

Table 1-8. E3 or DS-3 Protection Switch Unit Installation Kit

Quantity Description

5 Phillips dome-head screw for mounting IDU in rack,


No.10 (10-32) and No.12 (12-24)
5 Washers
2 DB9 male-to-male cables
4 BNC-to-BNC cables

16E1 Protected Systems


In addition to the ODU and IDU radio equipment listed in Tables 1-3 and 1-4, a Mux/
switching unit (MSU) and installation kit is required (one per terminal) to install a 16E1
protected system. Table 1-9 includes the parts list for the 16E1 configuration.

One direct-mount coupler or XP remote mount kit per terminal is also required. The parts
list for each is included in Tables 1-10 and 1-11. Each kit contains sufficient parts to
mount two IDUs.

Table 1-9. 16E1 Mux/Switching Unit Installation Kit

Quantity Description

5 Phillips dome-head screw for mounting IDU in rack,


No.10 (10-32) and No.12 (12-24).
5 Washers
2 DB9 male-to-male cables
4 BNC-to-BNC cables

1–8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installation Kits

Protected Systems—Outdoor Units


In addition to the ODU radio equipment listed in Table 1-4, additional equipment is
required for a protected ODU depending on the protected mode for your system—hot
standby, frequency diversity, or space diversity.
1
Hot Standby and Frequency Diversity
A dual ODU direct-mount coupler is required to mount the ODU. A dual ODU remote
mount installation kit is required when the ODU is mounted remotely from the antenna.
Each kit contains sufficient parts to mount two ODUs. The parts for each kit are included
in Tables 1-10 and 1-11 below.
Note: If you are installing dual antennas at each terminal, you do NOT need
either the ODU Direct-Mount Coupler or Remote Mount Kit.

Table 1-10.Dual ODU Direct-Mount Coupler/Splitter


Installation Kit (mounts 2 ODUs)

Quantity Description

1 Coupler body assembly with built in waveguide


1 Small “O” ring
1x (7-15GHz) Large “O” ring
2x (18-38GHz)
1 Radio stub spacer
1 Radio stub “H” twist
4 M4 cap head screws
1 Installation instructions

Table 1-11.Dual ODU Remote Mount Coupler/Splitter


Installation Kit (mounts 2 ODUs)

Quantity Description

1 Remote mount assembly


1 Adapter bend assembly
1 Seal
4 Screw socket caps M4x8
4 Screw socket caps M4x16
4 Spring washers
4 Plain washers
1 Installation instructions

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–9


Preparing for Installation

Table 1-12. ODU Indoor Rack Mount Coupler Installation Kit


Quantity Description

1 Seal
4 Screws M6x16
4 Screw socket caps M4x8
4 Screw socket caps M4x16
4 Hex screws M10x70
4 Nuts M10
4 Spring washers
4 Plain washers M4
8 Plain washers M10
1 7GHz racked coupler adapter
1 Nylon spacer
1 Coupler mounting plate (19”-5U)
1 Installation instructions

Space Diversity Protected Systems


In addition to the ODU and IDU radio equipment listed in Tables 1-3 and 1-4, a protection
switch installation kit is required (one per terminal) to install a space diversity protected
system. Table 1-8 includes the parts list for the E3 and DS-3 configurations. Table 1-9
includes the parts list for the 16E1 configuration.

With the space diversity configuration, each ODU attaches to its own separate antenna and
is spatially separated from any other ODU. No additional equipment is required to mount
ODUs in a Space Diversity configuration.

Required Tools and Equipment


The tools needed to install the radio include:

• Basic electrician’s toolkit (a voltmeter is recommended)


• Phillips screwdriver (No. 2)
• Adjustable wrench (5-20mm)
• Torque wrench (capable of 66 N-m or 50 ft-lb) with a ¾ inch socket
• Crimp tool suitable for attaching N-type connectors to an IDU-ODU cable (see the
crimp tool specifications listed in Table 1-15)
The equipment needed to install the radio is listed in Table 1-13.

1–10 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Required Tools and Equipment

Table 1-13.Required Installation Equipment

Function Equipment Specifications

Connecting the IDU to the Coaxial cable Length varies according to installation.
ODU See Table 1-15 for a list of approved cables,
connectors, and crimp tools. 1
Warning: Never install or remove the IDU/ODU cable while the IDU DC
power is on!
Connecting a remote Waveguide See Installing a Remote ODU on page 2–4 for
mounted ODU to the more information.
antenna
Grounding the ODU Earthing cable Use a #12 (3.3 mm2) wire to ground the ODU
to a pole or tower.
For more information, see Use a #12 (3.3 mm2) wire to ground the ODU
Grounding the ODU on page to a tripod or mount.
1–24 and the Stratex Use a #2 (33.6 mm2) wire to ground the tripod
Networks Standard or mount to the ground.
Practices Guide.
Ground lugs The ground lugs must fit the ODU grounding
studs, which are M6 and ¼-20
Conductive grease
Grounding the IDU Green PVC insulated Use a #14 (2.08 mm2) wire to ground the IDU
stranded copper wire to the equipment rack.
For more information on Use a #6 (13.3 mm2) wire to ground the rack to
grounding, see Grounding the station ground.
the IDU on page 1–22 and Ground lugs Use a 12x8x32 ground lug to attach the #14
the Stratex Networks ground wire to the IDU .
Standard Practices Guide.
Use a 12x10x32 ground lug to attach the #14
and #6 ground wires to the equipment rack.
Powering the IDU Multicolored PVC Use a #14 (2.08 mm2) wire to power the IDU.
insulated wire Use a red cable for the “V” power connection
and a black cable for negative power
connection.
Connecting alarm relay PVC insulated twisted pair Use 8-pair tin-plated #24 (.205 mm2) wire.
outputs and the external copper cable
input sensor from the IDU Male DB15 connector
to other equipment
Cover
Securing all cable runs Cable ties

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–11


Preparing for Installation

Installing the Cable


This section assumes that pre-planning of the link has occurred (path budgeting and
survey) to ensure good line-of-sight between the two link ends and cable run estimations.
For more information on pre-planning, see the Stratex Networks Standard Practices
Guide.

Installation Guidelines
Below are some guidelines to follow when installing coaxial cable:

• When installing the cable between the IDU and ODU, avoid excessive bending. Run
the cable where it is reasonably well protected and will not rub against sharp edges or
overly abrasive surfaces. We recommend that you use one cable tie every meter.
• Use the crimp tool and die specifically designed for the connectors and cable being
used (see Table 1-15). Use of generic crimp tools may result in sub-standard physical
connections that deteriorate the quality of the electrical transmission.
• Leave a “U-bend,” (also known as a “drip loop”) in the cable where it attaches to the
ODU. This prevents water from running down the cable onto the ODU connection
point and allows slack for re-positioning the antenna if necessary.
• When connecting the terminated indoor/outdoor cable to the ODU and IDU, the N-
type connectors should be tightened by hand. Using a tool such as pliers to tighten the
N-type connectors could result in damage to the connectors, the equipment, or both.

Cable and Connector Specifications


A 50-ohm coaxial cable is used to connect the IDU to the ODU. Only one cable is
required to connect the IDU to the ODU. Both ends of the cable must be terminated with
compatible N-type male connectors. For more information, see Terminating the IDU/
ODU Coaxial Cable on page 1-14. The N-type connectors are not supplied with the radio
equipment unless requested by the customer because the type of connector required
depends on the type of cable used for each installation.
The number of N-type connectors required varies according to the radio configuration and
whether lightning arrestors are used (see Table 1-14 ). Connectors must be crimpable.

Table 1-14. Number of Required Connectors


Configuration Without Lightning With Lightning
Arrestors Arrestors

Non-protected 2 4
Protected 4 8

The length of cable needed also depends on the type of cable used and the power supply
voltage as shown in Table 1-15.

1–12 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing the Cable

Table 1-15. Approved Cable and Connectors


Manufacturer & Belden 9913 Belden 9273 Andrew LDF2-50 Andrew LDF1-50 Times Microwave
Part No LMR-400
Cable Type RG-8/U RG-223/U RG-8/U
Nominal* Power
Supply Voltage
24 Vdc 48 or 60
Vdc
24 Vdc 48 or 60
Vdc
24 Vdc 48 or 60
Vdc
24 Vdc 48 or 60
Vdc
24 Vdc 48 or 60
Vdc
1
Cable Length ≤ 500 ft ≤ 1000 ft ≤ 150 ft ≤ 300 ft ≤ 500 ft ≤ 1000 ft ≤ 500 ft ≤ 1000 ft ≤ 500 ft <1000 ft
Limitations (150 m) (300 m) (50 m) (100 m) (150 m) (300 m) (150 m) (300 m) (150 m) (300 m)

Outer Conductor Duobond II 90% 2 silver-coated Copper Copper Bonded alum tape
tinned copper braid, copper braids, 95%
100% S.C. S.C.
Inner Conductor 10 (solid) 0.108 19 (solid) 0.034 Copper-clad AL Copper-clad AL Copper-clad AL
bare copper
Dielectric Semi-solid Silver-coated Foam polyethylene Foam polyethylene Foam polyethylene
polyethylene copper
Jacket Black PVC Polyethylene Black polyethylene Black polyethylene Black thermoplastic
Black PVC-NC elastomer

Diameter, in. (mm)


Over Jacket 0.405 (10.29) 0.212 (5.38) 0.440 (11.00) 0.345 (8.8) 0.405 (10.2)
Inner Conductor 0.108 (2.73) 0.034 (0.86) 0.122 (3.10) 0.102 (2.6) 0.109 (2.76)

DC Resistance, Ω/
1000 ft (1000m)
0.9 (3.0) 8.8 (28.9) 1.06 (3.48) 1.57 (5.15) 1.39 (4.5)
Inner Conductor
1.8 (5.9) 2.5 (8.2) 0.87 (2.85) 1.02 (3.33) 1.65(5.4)
Outer Conductor
Bend Radius in. 6.0 (151.8) 2.25 (57) 3.0 (76) 3.0 (76) 1.0 (24.5)
(mm)
Cable Weight, lb/ft 0.120 (0.180) 0.039 (0.058) 0.084 (0.126) 0.060 (0.090) 0.09 (0.135)
(kg/m)
Impedance 50 ohms
Temperature -40 to +85C
Range
Connectors N-type male, hex head crimped
Recommended RF Industries Refer to Belden Refer to Andrew Refer to Andrew RF Industries
Connector Models catalog catalog or website catalog or website

Recommended RG-8 type with RG-223 type with Refer to Andrew Refer to Andrew RG-8 type with
Crimp Tool/Hex Die 0.429 (10.9) hex 0.213 (5.4) hex die catalog or website catalog or website 0.429 (10.9) hex die
die
in. (mm)
Strip Dimensions a. 0.539 (13.7) a. 0.600 (15.2) Refer to Andrew Refer to Andrew a. .539 (13.7)
in. (mm) b. 0.250 (6.4) b. 0.275 (7.0) catalog or website catalog or website b. .250 (6.4)
c. 0.158 (4.0) c. 0.140 (3.5) c. .158 (4.0)
Hex Crimp Data
Cavity for Contact 0.116 (2.9) 0.100 (2.5) Refer to Andrew Refer to Andrew 0.116 (2.9)
Cavity for Ferrule 0.429 (10.9) 0.213 (5.4) catalog or website catalog or website 0.429 (10.9)

* Nominal voltage range definitions:


24 Vdc = 21.6 to 28.0 Vdc
48 Vdc = 43.0 to 57.6 Vdc
60 Vdc = 54.0 to 72.0 Vdc

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–13


Preparing for Installation

Terminating the IDU/ODU Coaxial Cable


The following instructions apply to a Belden 9913, a Belden 9273, or an LMR400 RG-8-
type cable.

To terminate the coaxial cable:


1 Cut the end of the cable evenly. Strip the cable to the dimensions shown below (refer to
the Strip Dimension row in Table 1-15 for the specific dimensions for each cable.) All
cuts should be sharp and square. Do not nick the braid, dielectric, or center conductor.
Notes: If you are using strain relief or heat shrink tubing, slide it onto the
cable now. Because the center conductor will be crimped, it is not
necessary to tin the contact.
2 Slide the ferrule over the cable.

cable ferrule braid center conductor


dielectric

3 Flare the end of the cable braid slightly to prepare for contact insertion. (Do not comb
out braid!) Slide the contact over the center conductor until it butts against the cable
dielectric. The center conductor should be visible through the inspection hole in the
contact.
4 Crimp the contact in place. Use the die set cavity specifications included in Table 1-15
for the contact (refer to the Hex Crimp Data row/Cavity for Contact).

ferrule flared contact


braid

1–14 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing the Cable

5 Insert the cable assembly into the body assembly. Push cable assembly forward until
the contact snaps into place within the dielectric.

dielectric

cable assembly body assembly

6 Slide the ferrule over the braid until it butts against the back of the connector. Crimp the
ferrule with a crimp tool using the die set cavity specifications included in Table 1-15
(refer to the Hex Crimp Data row/Cavity for Ferrule). Trim any extra braid.

Weatherproofing the Cable


The cable connection to the ODU should be weatherproofed using the cable-connector
weatherproof sleeve provided in the ODU Installation Kit or weatherproof tape provided
in an alternative installation kit. The two methods for weatherproofing are described
below.

Using a Weatherproof Sleeve


The ODU installation kit includes a short cardboard spacer, a weatherproof sleeve on a
cardboard tube, and a cable tie (see Figure 1-5).

Short Weatherproof Cardboard


spacer sleeve tube
Cable tie

Figure 1-5. Weatherproof Sleeve Kit

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–15


Preparing for Installation

To weatherproof the cable connector using a weatherproof sleeve:


1 Insert the short spacer into the cable’s N-connector. Then insert the cardboard tube into
the spacer.

N-connector Spacer Tube

2 Grasp the cable behind the N-connector and roll the weatherproof sleeve over the
connector end.

3 Continue rolling the weatherproof sleeve over the N-connector until the sleeve is
completely on the cable. Discard the cardboard tube and spacer.

Discard

4 Firmly hand tighten the N-connector to the ODU. Roll the weatherproof sleeve over the

1–16 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing the Cable

connector and up against the ODU housing.

5 Secure the sleeve with the cable tie provided in the kit.

Cable tie

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–17


Preparing for Installation

Using Weatherproof Tape


An alternative ODU installation kit includes 30 inches of Scotch 70 weatherproof tape,
which is a high-temperature splicing tape composed of self-fusing inorganic silicone
rubber with an easy stripping liner.
To weatherproof the cable connector using weatherproof tape:
1 Attach the coaxial cable to the ODU’s N-connector fitting.

Attach cable to ODU

2 Using mild tension, remove the backing from the weatherproof tape and wrap the entire
N-connector termination, from the ODU N-connector threads to one inch past the cable
connector.

Wrap tape under


mild tension

Tape
backing

3 Using mild tension and without stretching the tape, wrap the entire N-connector
termination with an additional layer of half-lapped tape from the ODU N-connector
threads to one inch past the cable’s N-connector. Before fusion takes place, press the

1–18 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing the Cable

tape down to avoid lifting.

1
Cover threads on
ODU N-connector

1” past cable
N-connector

Figure 1-6. Weatherproofing the Cable Connection

Warning: Power for the ODU is carried on the coaxial cable connecting the
IDU and ODU. Ensure that power to the IDU is turned off before
connecting or removing the cable from the ODU.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–19


Preparing for Installation

Installing the Antenna


Stratex Networks offers both standard and high-performance antennas from several major
manufacturers. Before installing the ODU and IDU, install the antenna(s) according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

For both 1+0 non-protected and 1+1 protected links, a slip-fit connection is available for
the direct mounting of the antennas or coupler to the XP4 Plus ODU. The slip-fit
connection minimizes installation complexity and losses due to waveguide connections
and is available for 0.3, 0.6, 0.8, 1.2 and 1.8 meter antenna sizes in all frequency bands.

Table 1-16 lists antenna sizes and the gain in decibels according to radio frequency.

Table 1-16.Antenna Size and Gains (dB)

Antenna 7/8 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 24/26 28 GHz 31 GHz 38 GHz
Size GHz

Gain (in decibels)

1 ft./.3 m. — 30.8 31.9 34.0 34.9 36.0 36.6 36.9 39.7

2 ft./.6 m. 30.4 35.5 36.6 38.7 40.1 41.1 41.9 42.2 44.5

2.5 ft./.8 m. 32.9 37.8 38.9 41.0 42.6 43.8 44.5 — —

4 ft./1.2 m. 36.9 41.5 42.6 44.7 46.0 46.9 — — —

6 ft./1.8 m. 40.3 45.0 46.0 48.0 49.4 — — — —

Refer to “Chapter 2, Installing the XP4 Plus” for specific installation and mounting
instructions.

1–20 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Grounding

Grounding
Proper grounding of equipment and structures is essential to prevent electrical damage to
the XP4 Plus system. This manual assumes that the installation site grounding is as shown
in Figure 1-7.

Warning: Grounding of all equipment at a radio site is required. Without


1
proper grounding, voltage potentials between components of
the system can cause electrical damage when interconnecting
cables are installed.
It is recommended that the ODU be installed with lightning protection, including lightning
arrestors. Also, to avoid surge current caused by lightning circulating to the equipment
earth system, connect the equipment earth system (true ground) to the lightning rod
ground. For more information, see the Stratex Networks Standard Practices Guide.
Note: Ground wires and hardware are not provided in the installation kit,
however grounding kits can be ordered separately.

ODU
GROUND
LUG

CONNECTOR
TO IDU

ODU

ANTENNA

LIGHTNING
ARRESTOR GROUND
WIRE

IDU-ODU
CABLE

IDU-ODU
CABLE TRAY Grounded to tower or
CABLE
through lightning arrestor,
if installed

1" x 19"
COPPER BUS BAR

IDU
GROUND
19" ALUMINUM RACK WIRES

STATION GROUND BAR

EQUIPMENT ROOM

Figure 1-7. Installation Site Grounding

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–21


Preparing for Installation

Grounding the IDU


The IDU frame is grounded through mounting hardware to either a 19- or 23-inch
equipment rack. The equipment rack must be connected to station or earth ground (see
Figure 1-7.) A #6 ground wire connects from the copper bus bar located at the top of the
equipment rack to the station ground bar. The ground bar should be installed as close to
the entrance of the building as possible (see Figure 1-9).

Figure 1-8. Frame Grounding the IDU


To ground the IDU:
1 Ensure that each surface of the IDU, IDU L-bracket, and equipment rack is clean and
free of rust or corrosion.
If the equipment rack is painted, remove the paint around the rack’s mounting screw.
2 Secure the IDU to the rack with mounting hardware.
3 Terminate a length of #6 wire to the station ground bar, as well as to any cross-connect
panels or other termination equipment.
4 Terminate the other end of the #6 wire with a 12x10x32 ground lug and secure to the
copper bus bar located at the top of the rack (see Figure 1-8) using a 10-32 rack screw.
5 Terminate a length of #14 green PVC insulated stranded copper wire with a 12x8x32
ground lug and attach to the grounding stud located on the IDU L-bracket.
6 Terminate the other end of the #14 green PVC insulated stranded copper wire with a
12x10x32 ground lug and secure to the copper bus bar located at the top of the
equipment rack using a 10-32 rack screw.

1–22 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Grounding

For instruction on installing both non-protected and protected IDUs, see “Chapter 2,
Installing the XP4 Plus.”

Figure 1-9. Station (Master) Ground Bar

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–23


Preparing for Installation

Grounding the ODU


A suitable #12 ground wire must connect the ODU ground lug (Figure 1-10) to an
appropriate ground point on the antenna mounting or tower. This connection is site-
dependent. The surface of all ground wire contact points must be clean to ensure a low-
resistance connection.

Figure 1-10. Frame Grounding the ODU


To ground the ODU:
1 Locate an attachment point for the ground such as a pole, tower bar structure or terminal
strip. The Universal round Member Adapter should be installed on the tower structure.
2 Remove any oxidation, zinc coating paint, or dirt from a surface over one-half inch
(13 mm) area surrounding the ground point.
3 Apply a coating of conductive grease to the wire and surrounding ground point to
ensure good electrical contact.
4 Terminate a length of #12 (3.3 mm2) wire with an M6 or 1/4x20 ground lug to the area
that was prepared on the pole, tower bar structure, or terminal strip.
5 Terminate the other end of the #12 (3.3 mm2) wire to one of the ODU grounding studs.
To connect the ground wire to the ODU, refer to the instructions on page 1–25.
Note: After tightening the connection, remove any excess conductive
grease.
6 Apply a coat of zinc-rich paint.

1–24 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Grounding

For a tripod or rooftop application, ensure that the trip or structure is grounded to the
building with a #2 (33.6 mm2) wire. Ensure that all locations where wires are terminated
are weatherproofed to prevent corrosion. Special care should be taken when using braided
grounding straps

The ODU has two grounding studs—one is a metric #6 stud, and the other is a
1/ -20 stud. The ground wire can be connected to either of these studs.
1
4

To connect the ground wire to the ODU:


1 Each ground stud contains two nuts. Remove one of the nuts from the stud. Ensure that
the bottom nut is tight to the case. Do not remove the bottom nut!

Bottom
Nut

2 Insert the ground lug, attached to the #12 wire, to the ground stud.

Ground
Lug

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 1–25


Preparing for Installation

3 Screw the second nut onto the ground stud and tighten.

For instruction on installing both non-protected and protected ODUs, see “Chapter 2,
Installing the XP4 Plus.”

1–26 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


1

Installing the XP4 Plus


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
This chapter includes the installation procedures for both non-protected and protected
terminals. For information on system components, tools needed for installation, and
procedures for installing the cable, refer to “Chapter 1, Preparing for Installation.”

Installing a Non-protected System

Installing a Non-protected ODU


Stratex Networks’ XP4 Plus ODU includes a proprietary circular ODU interface. The
ODU generally attaches directly to the antenna (direct-mount), however, a remote ODU
mounting kit is also available. A remotely mounted ODU does not require an interface on
the antenna. Installation procedures for both direct-mount and remotely mounted ODUs
are described in this section.

Installing a Direct-Mount ODU


The ODU mounts directly to the antenna with latches and spring-loaded retention clips, as
shown in Figure 2-1.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–1


Installing the XP4 Plus

Figure 2-1. Direct-mount ODU with Antenna

The polarization of the transmitted signal (either horizontal or vertical) is indicated by the
polarization indicator on the faceplate of the ODU, as shown in Figure 2-2. The ODU has
four mounting clips so that it may be fixed to the antenna according to the desired
polarization.
Note: The position of the polarization indicator on the ODU may vary
according to the radio frequency.

POL
POL

Horizontal Polarization Vertical Polarization

Figure 2-2. ODU Polarization Indicator

2–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Non-protected System

To install a direct-mount ODU:


1 Install the antenna according to manufacturer’s instructions (see Installing the Antenna
on page 1-20).
2 Use the captive spring clips on the ODU to attach it to the antenna, ensuring polarization
is correct.
3 Move the ODU/antenna assembly to the desired installation location on the pole, being
careful not to impact either the ODU or the antenna.

CLIP RETAINERS FOR


CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDE RF
2
ANTENNA ATTACHMENT
INTERFACE

AGC BNC
CONNECTOR

POLARIZATION
INDICATOR

N-TYPE CONNECTOR FOR


ODU-IDU CABLE

Figure 2-3. ODU Installation

4 Attach the ODU/antenna assembly to the pole and secure it.


Note: The location and orientation chosen for the assembly should have
adequate clearance behind the ODU to allow the installer to be
positioned behind it, so both installer and antenna are facing the
remote radio terminal.
5 Route, secure with cable ties, and terminate the ground between the ODU and a nearby
local ground point. For complete ODU grounding instructions, see Grounding the ODU
on page 1-24.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–3


Installing the XP4 Plus

Installing a Remote ODU


For remote radios or systems that require mounting the ODU separate from the antenna, a
length of flex waveguide is used to connect the antenna to the ODU, which is connected to
a remote mount. The remote mount contains a circular-to-rectangular waveguide
transition, providing a rectangular waveguide interface with tapped holes. A waveguide
adapter is available to mount a rectangular waveguide to an antenna with an XP interface.

The ODU remote mount, shown in Figure 2-4, secures the ODU with latches and spring-
loaded retention clips. The mount is designed for attachment to a pole of between 48 mm
and 115 mm (1.9 and 4.5 inches) in diameter using a V-bolt. The ODU is always attached
to the remote mount in vertical polarization mode, i.e. with the ODU polarization indicator
positioned vertically (see Figure 2-2).

V-Bolt

1/2" Washer

1/2"-13 Nut

Figure 2-4. Remote Mount ODU with Antenna


To install a remote mount ODU:
1 Install the antenna according to manufacturer’s instructions.
2 Remove the remote ODU mounting assembly and installation kit from the transport
box.
3 Loosely assemble the V-bolt to the remote ODU mount plate using two of the ½-13 hex
nuts and ½" flat washers supplied in the Remote Mount installation kit. See Figure 2-4
for reference.
4 Attach the ODU to the remote mount using captive spring clips on plate, ensuring
polarization is vertical. See Figure 2.2 for reference.
5 Attach one end of the flex waveguide to the remote mount ODU waveguide flange
using the hex bolts and Allen key provided in the installation kit.

2–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Non-protected System

Note: The waveguide section should be terminated on one side with a PBR-
type flange (square, 4-hole, with gasket groove) to be compatible
with the UBR flange (square, 4-hole, without gasket groove) on the
coupler. Depending on the antenna flange, the other side of the flex
waveguide section should be terminated with either a PBR or UBR
flange. All waveguide junctions require a PBR to UBR (gasket to
cover) interface.
6 Ensure that the gasket is installed in the flex waveguide PBR flange prior to assembly.
Cover the open end of the flex waveguide or coupler to prevent entry of foreign matter.

2
Stow flex waveguide for transportation to its point of installation.
7 Move the ODU assembly to the desired installation location on the pole, being careful
not to impact the ODU or flex waveguide.
8 Use a V-bolt to attach the assembly to the pole.
Note: The location and orientation chosen should have enough clearance
behind the antenna assembly to allow the installer to be positioned
behind it, so both installer and antenna are facing the remote radio
terminal.
9 Secure the assembly to the pole.
10 Lay-in, secure with cable ties, and terminate the ground between the ODU and a nearby
local earth point. Use the jam and lock nuts provided on the grounding post to secure
the ground connection. For complete ODU grounding instructions, see Grounding the
ODU on page 1-24.

Installing a Non-protected IDU


The IDU requires only 1RU (rack unit) of vertical rack space and 250 mm rack depth. No
space above or below the IDU is required for ventilation purposes. IDUs may be stacked
in adjacent racks. For 16E1, 2RU of vertical rack space is required for the IDU and MSU.
To install a non-protected IDU:
1 Position the IDU as required in the equipment rack and secure it using the four No. 12
Phillips dome-head screws provided in the installation kit (see Figure 2-5).
2 Lay in, secure with cable ties, and terminate the ground cable (at least #14 wire
2
recommended {2.08 mm conductor}) between the IDU ground post and the rack’s
ground bus bar. For complete IDU grounding instructions, see Grounding the IDU on
page 1-22

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–5


Installing the XP4 Plus

Figure 2-5. IDU Installed in a Rack

3 Use the nut and captive lock washer provided on the grounding post to secure the
ground connection.
4 Tighten the nut using a small adjustable wrench. If required for space clearance, attach
a 90°° N-type adapter to the ODU port on the IDU front panel (see Figure 2-6).

N-type
Adapter

Figure 2-6. 90o N-Type Adapter Example

Refer to Figures 2-7 through 2-9 for the IDU connector locations.

2–6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Non-protected System

Chassis Protection
Port RJ45 Connectors for Network
Ground Management Interface
3.15A Slo- DB25 Female
Traffic Connector (NMI) Option
Blow Fuse
AUX 1 AUX 2 TRIBS 5-8

M
L
IDU
OD
ON

CB
RE
MGMT 1 VT100
ALARMS
PROTECTION

R
R
Y

E TE

TE
FG
WE

IN
CIT
EQ

US PU

L
K ID
Computer

CT

MO
CA R /

ED
IB C

CA
PO

SE /
FR

IN OM
PA

GG
LE
L
BE

PIN

RE
LIN

LO
RS

TR

C
Tx
Tx

LO
ODU ALARM RELAYS TRIBS 1-4 MGMT 2 10BT

3-Pin Power
Connector N-Type ODU DB15 Female Alarm Relay Output
DB9 Female RS232
Connection for PC
2
Connector & External Input Connector Running LinkView

Figure 2-7. XP4 Plus 2x/4x IDU Connectors

Chassis
Ground DB25 Female RJ45 Connectors for Network
3.15A Slo- Management Interface
Blow Fuse Traffic Connectors
(NMI) Option
Aux #1 Aux #2 Tribs 5-8
ODU MGMT 2 10BT

Alarm Relays Protection Tribs 1-4 Computer

MGMT 1 VT100

DB15 Female Alarm Relay Output DB9 Female RS232


3-Pin Power & External Input Connector Connection for PC
Connector N-Type ODU Running LinkView
Connector
Figure 2-8. XP4 Plus 4x/8x IDU Connectors

CHASSIS BNC TRAFFIC


CONNECTORS RJ45 CONNECTORS FOR
GROUND
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
PROTECTION INTERFACE (NMI) OPTION
3.15A SLO-
BLOW FUSE PORT

COMPUTER

3-PIN POWER
CONNECTOR DB15 FEMALE ALARM RELAY OUTPUT
& EXTERNAL INPUT CONNECTOR

N-TYPE ODU DB9 FEMALE RS232


CONNECTOR CONNECTION FOR PC RUNNING
'LinkView'

Figure 2-9. XP4 Plus E3 and DS-3 IDU Connectors


PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–7
Installing the XP4 Plus

5 Pull the terminated IDU/ODU cable into the rack, securing with cable ties as necessary
and leaving a 0.5m service loop at the IDU connection point. Connect the cable to 90°
N-type adapter (if installed) or the ODU connector of the IDU.
6 Install the tributary data signal cables on the IDU traffic connectors. These cables are
used to pass customer data from the radio to other equipment. The type of tributary
cable required corresponds to the XP4 radio’s capacity. Table 2-1 lists the various
capacities, both balanced and unbalanced, and the corresponding tributary connections.
Table 2-1. Tributary Connections

Capacity Data Interface Tributary Cables Number of Cables


(by capacity)

2/4E1, 4/8E1, 16E1 Unbalanced 75Ω DB25 to 8 BNC 1, 2, 4

2/4E1, 4/8E1, 16E1 Balanced 120Ω 1, 2, 4


DB25 to 4 RJ45
4/8 DS-1 Balanced 100Ω 2

2/4E1, 4/8E1, 16E1 Balanced 120Ω 1, 2, 4


DB25 to wirewrap
4/8 DS-1 Balanced 100Ω 2

E3, DS-3 Unbalanced 75Ω Customer-supplied BNC to BNC 2 (BNC to BNC)

See Table 2-4 and Figures 2-12 through 2-14 for tributary pinout and wirewrap
instructions.

7 If required, install alarm relay wiring to the female DB15 connector on the IDU front
panel. See Table 6-4 for alarm relay wiring details. We recommend the use of #24
(.205 mm2,) 8-pair, tin-plated, PVC-insulated, twisted pair, copper cable .
8 The XP4 Plus requires DC power (±21.6 to 60 Vdc) via a 3-pin connector. Ensure that
the plug provided in the installation kit is wired as detailed in Figure 2-10. #14 wire
2
(2.08 mm conductor) is recommended with ends stripped back by 3 mm and secured
with a 3-pin Weidmuller connector using a small flat-blade screwdriver.

Figure 2-10. IDU Power Connector Pinout

2–8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Non-protected System

Caution: Measure the voltage on the DC power connector before it is


connected to the IDU. Figure 2-10 shows the required power
connector pinout.
Warning: This product meets global product safety requirements for safety
extra-low voltage (SELV) rated equipment. The input voltage
MUST be 24 or 48V nominal, 60V maximum. Where an external
main power supply unit is used to supply products, the supply
output must be guaranteed to remain within the safety extra-low
voltage (SELV) limits in the event of a single internal fault.

2
Installing an MSU (16E1 only)
Customers who need E3 capacity but don’t have compatible equipment can meet their
needs by adding a multiplexer switching unit (MSU). Instead of using one large E3 pipe to
carry data, the MSU converts the system into 16 separate E1 connections.
To install an MSU:
1 Position the MSU either directly below or above the E3 IDU in the equipment rack and
secure it using 4 No. 12 Phillips dome-head screws provided in the installation kit.
2 Connect the BNC cables from the MSU to the IDU—Tx A to Tx A, Rx A to Rx A.
3 Connect the DB9 cable from the MSU to the IDU.
Caution: Verify that the IDU is powered OFF before connecting or
disconnecting the IDU to/from the MSU DB9 “Protection” cable.

BNC Cables DB9 Cable

IDU

MSU
Customer Data IDU-MSU
Connectors E3 Receive Communications

E3 Transmit

Figure 2-11. XP4 Plus 16E1 Connectors

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–9


2–10
- XXX Cable Length (+/- 2 in)
-001 Unsupported A Yellow
DT1/5 <-

-002 2.5 ft. B Yellow


-003 3 ft. DT1/5 ->
-004 4 ft.
-005 5 ft. C Green
DT2/6 <-
-006 6 ft.
Installing the XP4 Plus

-007 7 ft. D Green


DT2/6 ->
-008 8 ft.
E Blue
-015 15 ft. DT3/7 <-

F Blue
-999 999 ft. DT3/7 ->

G Red
DT4/8 <-

H Red
DT4/8 ->

GENERAL NOTES:
Connection Table Unless Otherwise Specified
Data Signal DB25 Pin BNC Trib Marking
1. Interpret dimensions and tolerances per ITEM NOTES QTY
(In/Out of BNC) Connector Heatshrink Color
4 ANSI Y14.5M or ASME Y14.5M
DT1 Tip In 14 Center 1 DB25 Male Connector 1
DT1 Shield In 2, 15 Shield Yellow DT 1/5 <- Assemble per workmanship standard
DT1 Tip Out 3 Center
2 and/or manufactuers suggested methods. 2 DB Backshell / Hood, Shielded 1
DT1 Shield Out 4, 16 Shield Yellow DT 1/5 -> Soldering internal to the connector housing
(if used) must meet the IPC-610B Class 3 4-40 Thumbscrew 2
DT2 Tip In 17 Center II Specification.
4 Epoxy adhesive inside hood to stabilize sheath 1
DT2 Shield In 5, 18 Shield Green DT 2/6 <-
DT2 Tip Out 6 Center 3. TEST CABLE FOR CONTINUITY.
Clear Heatshrink over Marking tape. Mark
DT2 Shield Out 7, 19 Shield Green DT 2/6 -> 5 1
* Pin #s indicated this way are connected with P/N and Dash No. from Cable Length Table
4 with each other and front shell.
DT3 Tip In 20 Center 6 Expando type net sheath over 8 runs of RG 179. 1
DT3 Shield In 8, 21 Shield Blue DT 3/7 <-
DT3 Tip Out 9 Center 7 Heatshrink tubing to stabilize end of sheath 1
DT3 Shield Out 10, 22 Shield Blue DT 3/7 ->
Clear Heatshrink over marking tape. Mark
8 per Connection Table, Letters upright, 8
DT4 Tip In 23 Center
DT4 Shield In 11, 24 Shield Red DT 4/8 <- Arrow closest to BNC, as shown.
DT4 Tip Out 12 Center Colored Heatshrink over BNC Ferrule
DT Shield Out 13, 25 Shield Red DT 4/8 ->
9 8
onto Coaxial.

Figure 2-12. DB25 to BNC Pinouts for Unbalanced Tributary Connections


Shield-Ground 1, Front Shell 10 75 Ohm BNC Male Crimp 8

XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XXX

6" minimum 24" +/- 1"

4" +/- 1"


18C Min.
Protrusion of 8 4X
Thumbscrews

4 5 7
6

3
2X
2
4X 9

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002


6" +
/ - 1"
4X

NOTES: Unless Otherwise Specified


1. Interpret dimensions and tolerances per
ANSI Y14.5M or ASME Y14.5M Ref Signal In / Out DB25 Pin RJ-45
Wire Color
*

2. Assemble per workmanship standard (Marking) (of RJ 45) = Connected Together Pin

and/or manufactuers suggested methods. DT1 Tip In 14 2


ITEM NOTES QTY DT1 Ring In 15 1
*

(A) DT1 Shield In 2 8


3. Test cable for continuity 1 DB25 Male Connector 1 DT 1/5
DT 1/5 DT1 Tip Out 3 5
DT1 Ring Out 4 4
DB Backshell / Hood, Shielded
*

2 1 DT1 Shield Out 10 3


- XXX Cable Length (+/- 2 in) DT2 Tip In 17 2
3 4-40 Thumbscrew 2 DT2 Ring In 18 1
*

-001 Unsupported (B) DT2 Shield In 5 8


DT 2/6
4 Epoxy adhesive inside hood to stabilize sheath 1 DT 2/6
DT2 Tip Out 6 5
DT2 Ring Out 7 4
*

-002 2.5 ft. Clear Heatshrink over Marking tape. Mark with P/N DT2 Shield Out 19 3

Figure 2-13. DB25 to RJ45 Balanced Tributary Connections


-003 3 ft. 5 1
and Dash No. from Cable Length Table DT3 Tip In 20 2
-004 4 ft. DT3 Ring In 21 1
(C
*

Expando type net sheath over 4 runs, DT3 Shield In 8 8


-005 5 ft. 6 1 ) DT 3/7
each run / cable_ 2 twisted pair solid, 22-24 AWG, DT 3/7 DT3 Tip Out 9 5
-006 6 ft.
DT3 Ring Out 10 4
-007 7 ft. each pair shielded, with solid drain wire
*

DT3 Shield Out 22 3


-008 8 ft. DT4 Tip In 23 2
7 Heatshrink tubing to stabilize end of sheath 1
DT4 Ring In 24 1
(D
*

DT4 Shield In 11 8
-015 15 ft. 8 RJ45 Conn., male, crimp 4 ) DT 4/8
DT 4/8 DT4 Tip Out 12 5
DT4 Ring Out 13 4
Clear Heatshrink over marking tape. Mark per DT4 Shield Out 25 3
-999 999 ft. 9 4
Connection Table, Letters upright as shown
**

Shield/Ground 1, Front Shell


Installing a Non-protected System

2–11
2
4
XXX

2–12
6" 24" +/- 1"
4" +/- 1"
A DT1 IN
18C Min. - 2x DT1 OUT

B DT2 IN
DT2 OUT
Installing the XP4 Plus

C DT3 IN
4 5 7
6 6" +/- 1" DT3 OUT
3
DT

2X
4/
8

4 2 D
DT4 IN
4X 8
DT4 OUT

Ref Signal In / Out DB25 Pin


4 Wire Color
(Marking) (of wire ends) GENERAL NOTES: Unless Otherwise Specified
DT1 Tip In 14 Yellow 1. Interpret dimensions and tolerances per
DT1 Ring In 15 Gray 3. Test cable for continuity
ANSI Y14.5M or ASME Y14.5M
(A) DT1 Shield In Black
* Pin #s indicated this way are connected
DT 1/5 DT1 Tip Out
*3 Red 2. Assemble per workmanship standard 4 with each other and front shell.
DT1 Ring Out 4 Green and/or manufactuers suggested methods.
DT1 Shield Out Black

DT2 Tip In
*
17 Yellow
DT2 Ring In 18 Gray
DT2 Shield In Black
- XXX Cable Length (+/- 2 in)
(B)
DT 2/6 DT2 Tip Out
*6 Red
ITEM NOTES QTY
-001 Unsupported
DT2 Ring Out 7 Green
DT2 Shield Out Black 1 DB25 Male Connector 1
* -002 2.5 ft.
DT3 Tip In 20 Yellow 2 DB Backshell / Hood, Shielded 1
-003 3 ft.
DT3 Ring In 21 Gray
DT3 Shield In Black -004 4 ft. 3 4-40 Thumbscrew 2
(C)
DT 3/7 * -005 5 ft.
DT3 Tip Out 9 Red
DT3 Ring Out 10 Green -006 6 ft. 4 Epoxy adhesive inside hood to stabilize sheath 1
DT3 Shield Out Black -007 7 ft.
* -008 8 ft. Clear Heatshrink over Marking tape. Mark with P/N
DT4 Tip In 23 Yellow 5 1
and Dash No. from Cable Length Table
DT4 Ring In 24 Gray
DT4 Shield In Black Expando type net sheath over 4 runs,
(D)
DT 4/8 * -010 10 ft. 6 each run / cable_ 2 twisted pair solid, 22-24 AWG, 1
DT4 Tip Out 12 Red
DT4 Ring Out Green -015 15 ft. each pair shielded, with solid drain wire
13
DT4 Shield Out Black Heatshrink tubing to stabilize end of sheath 1
* 7
Front Shell
Shield/Ground -999 999 ft. Clear Heatshrink over marking tape. Mark per
1, 2, 5, 8, 11, 16, 19, 22, 25
* 8 4
Connection Table, Letters upright as shown

Figure 2-14. DB25 to Wirewrap Balanced Tributary Connection Instructions

XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Protected System

The XP4 Plus non-protected terminal is now installed and ready for commissioning. For
instructions on commissioning non-protected terminals, refer to Chapter 3.

Installing a Protected System

Installing a Protected ODU


Protected XP4 Plus ODUs use standard antennas. The installation procedure for each
terminal depends on the kind of mount you are using. The figures below show available
options: 2
Mounting to one antenna with protected
ODU direct mount. Instructions are
provided on the following page.

Mounting to one antenna with protected


ODU remote mount bracket. See page 2-
18 for mounting instructions.

Mounting to one antenna with T-style remote-


mounting bracket. See page 2-21 for mounting
instructions.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–13


Installing the XP4 Plus

Mounting to dual antennas. See page 2-22 for


mounting instructions.

Mounting to One Antenna with Direct Mount


Coupler/Splitter
Stratex Networks’ slip-fit dual ODU mounts come in 3 dB (equal splitter) and 6 dB
(unequal coupler) versions. The same installation procedure applies for each version.

The following tools are needed to install the direct-mount coupler/splitter:

• 1 off torque driver suitable for a 3 mm A/F Allen key


• 1 off Allen Key (3 mmA/F) to suit M4 cap head screw
For installation instructions, refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation that
was shipped with the coupler. Figure 2-15 shows a typical coupler assembly.

RADIO
RADIO
ADAPTOR
ADAPTOR
COUPLER BRACKET
BRACKET
BODY
CUSTOMERS
RADIO
RETAINER

RADIO
STUB
SHACKLE
ATTACHMENT
HOLES (4 PLACES)

‘O’ RING

ANTENNA
RETAINER
CLIP

ANTENNA
RETAINER
CLIP
CUSTOMERS COUPLER
RADIO BODY
RETAINER
GENERAL LATCH GENERAL
ARRANGEMENT ARRANGEMENT
7 – 15 GHz 18 - 38GHz
COUPLER COUPLER

2–14 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Protected System

Figure 2-15. Coupler Assembly

Warning: There is a risk of antenna failure if the coupler fixings are not
tightened according to recommended values.

Installing the Direct-Mount Coupler to the Antenna


1 With the antenna retainer latches open (see figure below), carefully insert the radio stub
into the antenna adapter bracket (ensuring the ‘O’ ring is attached).

2 Lock the antenna retainer latches while ensuring they are correctly seated on the
antenna retainer clips.
3 Remove the lifting shackle.
Warning: If the antenna requires cleaning, DO NOT USE A SOLVENT-BASED
SOLUTION.
To attach the first radio:
1 Remove the protective plugs from the front of the radio adapter brackets.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–15


Installing the XP4 Plus

2 Ensure that the customer’s radio ‘O’ ring is seated correctly on the radio stub.

3 With the radio retainer latches open, carefully insert the radio stub into the antenna
adapter bracket (ensuring the ‘O’ ring is attached). Lock the radio retainer latches,
making sure they are correctly seated onto the radio retainer clips.
To attach the second radio:
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 above.

5 Move the ODU/antenna assembly to the desired installation location on the pole, being
careful not to impact either the ODU or the antenna.
6 Attach the ODU/antenna assembly to the pole and secure it.
Note: The location and orientation chosen for the assembly should have
adequate clearance behind the ODU to allow the installer to be
positioned behind it, so both installer and antenna are facing the
remote radio terminal.
7 Route, secure with cable ties, and terminate the ground between the ODU and a nearby
local ground point. For complete ODU grounding instructions, see Grounding the ODU
on page 1-24.

2–16 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Protected System

Electrical Configuration
The waveguide assembly built into the HSB mount combines the outputs and inputs of
two standard XP4 Plus ODUs to an antenna using either a 6 dB waveguide coupler or 3 dB
splitter. See Table 2-2 for more details on typical power losses for waveguide assemblies.

Table 2-2. Coupler Losses, Typical


Waveguide Coupler Primary Path Standby Path
Insertion Loss Insertion Loss

6 dB unequal coupler 1.6 dB 6.4 dB


2
3 dB equal splitter 3.5 dB 3.5 dB

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–17


Installing the XP4 Plus

Mounting to One Antenna with Remote Mounts


Installation of the remote mount coupler requires the following tools:

• Rachet torque wrench with a socket suitable for an M10 (17 mm A/F) fixing.
• Ring and open-end spanner suitable for an M10 fixing (17 mm A/F).
• Torque driver suitable for a 3 mm A/F Allen Key.
• Allen key (3 mm A/F) to suit M4 cap head screw.
For instructions on unpacking the coupler assembly, refer to the manufacturer’s
installation documentation that was shipped with the coupler. The following section
describes attaching the remote mount.

Attaching the Remote Mount


1 Remove and retain from the remote mount assembly the 4-off M10 hex head screws,
complete with plain washers and spring washers (see figure on the next page).
2 Match the remote-mount assembly to the coupler body while ensuring that the slots on
the ‘V’ brackets are facing towards what will be the ground. Secure together with the
fixings retained from Step 1, tightened to the appropriate torque (see Table 2-3).

REMOTE MOUNT ASSEMBLY


FIXINGS:
M10 HEX HED SCREW, PLAIN
WASHER AND SPRING
WASHER

COUPLER
BODY

‘V’
BRACKETS

REMOTE MOUNT
ASSEMBLY

‘V’ BRACKET SLOTS


MUST POINT
TOWARDS THE
GROUND

Table 2-3. Torque Table


Size Metric (nn) Max

M4 3.3
M10 V Bracket 20
M10 35

2–18 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Protected System

Warning: There is a risk of antenna failure if fixings are not tightened to


these recommended values.

Site Installation of Remote Mount Coupler


1 Attach a lifting shackle to the remote mount coupler assembly.

2 Move the remote mount coupler assembly to the required pole position and secure by
pivoting the ‘V’ brackets onto the allthread (see figure below). The slots in the ‘V’
brackets must be pointing toward the ground. Secure the remote mount coupler to the
site by tightening the M10 ‘V’ bracket fixings to the recommended torque
(see Table 2-3). 2

‘V’ BRACKETS

ALLTHREAD

‘V’ BRACKET
SLOTS MUST
POINT TOWARDS
THE GROUND

3 Remove the lifting shackle from the remote mount coupler assembly.
To attach the first radio:
1 Remove the protective plugs from the front of the radio adapter brackets.
2 Ensure that the radio ‘O’ ring is seated correctly on the radio stub.
3 With the radio retainer latches open, carefully insert the radio stub into the radio adapter
bracket (ensuring the ‘O’ ring is attached). Lock the radio retainer latches, taking care
that they are correctly seated onto the radio retainer clips.
To attach the second radio:
Repeat steps 1 through 3 above.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–19


Installing the XP4 Plus

4 Connect the flexible waveguide between the customer’s radios and the antenna.

Note: The waveguide section should be terminated on one side with a


gasketed UBR flange (square, 4-hole) to be compatible with the un-
gasketed (cover) UBR flange on the coupler. Depending on antenna
interface flange, the other side of the flex waveguide section should
be terminated with either a gasketed or cover UBR flange. All
waveguide junctions require a gasket to cover the UBR interface.
5 Route, secure with cable ties, and terminate the ground between the ODU and a nearby
local ground point. For complete ODU grounding instructions, see Grounding the ODU
on page 1-24.

2–20 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Protected System

Mounting Dual ODUs to a Single Antenna with


‘T-Style’ Mount

1 Remove the dual ODU pole mount and installation kit from the transport box.
2 Use 2 each of the ½-13 hex nuts and ½” flat washers supplied in the installation kit to
loosely assemble the V-bolt to the dual ODU pole mount (see figure above).
3 Use the captive spring clips on the assembly mount to attach both ODUs to the dual
ODU pole. Ensure ODU polarization is vertical, i.e. with the ODU polarization
indicator positioned relative to the orientation of the rectangular waveguide and
coupler.
4 If flex waveguide is used between the ODUs and antenna, attach one end of the flex
waveguide to the coupler using the 4-40 Allen bolts, No. 4 lock washers, and the 3/32
Allen key provided in the installation kit.
Note: The waveguide section should be terminated on one side with a
gasketed UBR flange (square, 4-hole) to be compatible with the un-
gasketed (cover) UBR flange on the coupler. Depending on antenna
interface flange, the other side of the flex waveguide section should
be terminated with either a gasketed or cover UBR flange. All
waveguide junctions require a gasket to cover the UBR interface.
5 Install the gasket in the flex waveguide UBR flange prior to assembly. Cover the open
end of the flex waveguide or coupler to prevent entry of foreign matter. Stow the flex
waveguide for transport to its point of installation.
6 Move the ODU assembly to the desired installation location on the pole, being careful
not to impact the ODUs or coupler/flex waveguide.
7 Attach the assembly to the pole using the V-bolt.
8 Torque the ½-13 V-bolt hex nuts to 66 N-m (50 ft-lb) to secure the assembly to the pole.
9 Lay-in, secure with cable ties, and terminate the grounds between both ODUs and a
nearby local earth point. Use the jam and lock nuts provided on the ODU grounding
studs to secure ground connection. For complete ODU grounding instructions, see
Grounding the ODU on page 1-24.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–21


Installing the XP4 Plus

10 Connect the coupler output to the antenna:


- If the ODUs are to be mounted close to the antenna, use flex waveguide to connect
the coupler to the antenna. Attach the free end of the waveguide installed in Step 4
to the antenna using the 4-40 Allen bolts, No.4 lock washers, and 3/32 Allen key
provided in the installation kit.
- If the ODUs are to be mounted further away from the antenna, install elliptical type
waveguide between the two locations, terminating one side with a gasketed UBR
or PBR flange. Attach flange to coupler using the 4-40 Allen bolts, No. 4 lock
washers, and 3/32 Allen key provided in the installation kit. The other side should
be terminated with a UBR-type flange. Ensure gaskets are installed in all gasket
grooves prior to assembly.
11 If necessary, weatherproof, ground, and pressurize the waveguide connections at the
ODU and antenna ends of the waveguide run according to local engineering practices.

Electrical Configuration
The waveguide assembly combines the outputs and inputs of two standard XP4 Plus
ODUs to an antenna using either a 6 dB waveguide coupler or 3 dB splitter. The insertion
loss through the primary path is typically 1.6 dB for the coupler plus losses due to any
flexible waveguide and circular-to-rectangular waveguide transitions used to connect the
ODU assembly and the remotely mounted antenna.

See Table 2-2 for more details on typical power losses for waveguide assemblies. If you
are using flexible waveguide, add 1.0 dB to the losses shown in these tables.

Mounting to Two Antennas


The dual ODU/dual antenna configuration (redundant antennas) employs two of the single
ODU/single antenna arrangements typically used in a non-protected system. Two single
ODU/single antenna configurations, each connected to its respective IDU, are used to
provide the primary and secondary paths. This configuration is required for Space
Diversity protection systems (E3/16E1/DS-3). If redundant antennas are required, the
antennas must be fitted with the XP-type circular interface for each antenna to mount its
own ODU.

2–22 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Protected System

The steps below are for installation of one antenna. Repeat the steps to install the second
antenna:

1 Install the antenna according to manufacturer’s instructions.


2 Use the captive spring clips on the ODU to attach it to the antenna, ensuring polarization
is correct (see figure below).

CLIP RETAINERS FOR


CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDE RF
ANTENNA ATTACHMENT
INTERFACE

2
AGC BNC
CONNECTOR

POLARIZATION
INDICATOR

N-TYPE CONNECTOR FOR


ODU-IDU CABLE

3 Move the ODU/antenna assembly to desired installation location on the pole, being
careful not to impact either ODU or antenna.
4 Attach assembly to pole and secure it.
Note: The location and orientation chosen for the assembly should have
adequate clearance behind the ODU to allow the installer to be
positioned behind it, so both installer and antenna are facing the
remote radio terminal.
5 Route, secure with cable ties, and terminate ground between the ODU and a nearby
local ground point. Use jam and lock nuts provided on grounding post to secure ground
connection. For complete ODU grounding instructions, see Grounding the ODU on
page 1-24.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–23


Installing the XP4 Plus

Installing a Protected IDU


A protected XP4 Plus system includes two IDUs and a protection switch unit. XP4 Plus
protected systems require only 250 mm rack depth and 3RU (rack unit) of vertical rack
space. No space above, below, or between the units is required for ventilation purposes
because the whole system dissipates less than 35W (approximately 11W per shelf).
Protection systems may be stacked adjacently in racks.
To install the IDU:
1 Install each IDU in a rack with a 1RU space between them. Secure the lower IDU to the
rack, but leave the upper IDU loose enough to adjust horizontally (see Figure 2-16).
2 Secure each IDU using the 4 No. 12 Phillips dome-head screws provided in the
installation kit.
3 Lay in, secure with cable ties, and terminate the ground cable (at least #14 wire is
2
recommended {2.08 mm conductor}) between the IDU ground post and the rack’s
ground bus bar. For complete grounding instructions, see Grounding the IDU on page
1-22.

Figure 2-16. IDUs Installed in a Rack

4 Use the nut and captive lock washer provided on the grounding post to secure ground
connection.
5 Tighten the nut using a small adjustable wrench.
6 If required, attach a 90° N-type adapter to the ODU port on the IDU front panel. Refer
to Figures 2-7 through 2-9 and Figure 2-11 for IDU connector locations.

2–24 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Protected System

7 Pull the terminated IDU/ODU cable into the rack, securing with cable ties as necessary.
Either leave a 0.5m service loop at the IDU connection point or connect the cable to a
90° N-type adapter, which is connected to the ODU port of the IDU.
8 Install tributary data signal cables on the protection switch “TRIB” connectors..

Table 2-4. IDU Tributary DB25 Pinout


DB25 Connector Trib Unbalanced Balanced
Pin #
1 N/A Overall Shield Overall Shield
2
Pin 1 Pin 13 2 1/5 In Shield Shield
3 1/5 Out Center Tip
Pin 14 Pin 25
4 1/5 Out Shield Ring
5 2/6 In Shield Shield
6 2/6 Out Center Tip
7 2/6 Out Shield Ring
8 3/7 In Shield Shield
9 3/7 Out Center Tip
10 3/7 Out Shield Ring
11 4/8 In Shield Shield
12 4/8 Out Center Tip
13 4/8 Out Shield Ring
14 1/5 In Center Tip
15 1/5 In Shield Ring
16 1/5 Out Shield Shield
17 2/6 In Center Tip
18 2/6 In Shield Ring
19 2/6 Out Shield Shield
20 3/7 In Center Tip
21 3/7 In Shield Ring
22 3/7 Out Shield Shield
23 4/8 In Center Tip
24 4/8 In Shield Ring
25 4/8 Out Shield Shield

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–25


Installing the XP4 Plus

To install the protection switch:


1 Position the protection switch unit or MSU between the IDUs.
2 Secure the protection switch and IDU into the rack using 4-off No.10 Phillips dome-
head screws provided in the Protection Switch Installation Kit.
3 Depending on which protection switch you are installing, connect the cables as shown
in Figures 2-17 through 2-19. For complete details on protection switch modes, see
Selecting a Protection Mode on page 3-7.
4 Connect the cable from the ODU to IDU (see note below) and ensure the IDUs are
grounded properly (see Grounding the IDU on page 1-22).
Note: The ODUs are mounted either on a coupler or a splitter. If they are
mounted on a coupler, each of the two ODUs is connected to a
different port: one to a 6 db coupled port and the other to a 1.6 db
thru port. The cable from the thru port ODU should be connected to
IDU A and the cable from the coupled port ODU to IDU B. This
provides the least amount of insertion loss to the primary side.

Protection cables

IDU

Customer Prot.
Data Switch

IDU

2–26 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Protected System

Figure 2-17. Cable Connections for Front Access 2x/4x and


4x/8x Protected Systems

IDU A

Customer
Data SU

2
IDU B

Figure 2-18. Cable Connections for E3 and DS-3 Protected


Systems

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–27


Installing the XP4 Plus

IDU

Customer
Data MSU

IDU

Figure 2-19. Cable Connections for 16E1 Protected Systems

5 Install the customer’s data signal cables to the tributary connectors on the protection
switch.
Warning: Products with Telecommunications Network Voltage (TNV)
circuits are typically not rated for direct connection to the Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Tributary and wayside ports
are intended for connection only to circuits isolated from the
PSTN, e.g. for connection to PBX, class 5 switches, ATM switches
or to products supplying the necessary electrical isolation and
protection.
6 Install DC power to both IDUs (+21.6 to 60 V) via the 3-pin connectors. Ensure that the
plugs provided in the IDU installation kits are wired as detailed in Figure 2-20.
2
#14 wire (2.08 mm conductor) is recommended. Strip ends back by 3 mm and secure
in connector using a small flatblade screwdriver.

2–28 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing a Protected System

Warning: The same polarity DC input must be used for both IDUs.

Figure 2-20. IDU Power Connector Pinout


Caution: Measure the voltage on the DC power connector before it is
connected to the IDU. Figure 2-20 shows the required power
connector pinout.
Warning: This product meets global product safety requirements for safety
extra-low voltage (SELV) rated equipment. The input voltage
MUST be 24V or 48V nominal, 60V maximum. Where an external
main power supply unit is used to supply products, the supply
output must be guaranteed to remain within the safety extra-low
voltage (SELV) limits in the event of a single internal fault.
The XP4 Plus protection switch is now installed. For commissioning instructions, see
“Chapter 3, Commissioning the XP4 Plus.”

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 2–29


Installing the XP4 Plus

2–30 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


1

3
Commissioning the XP4 Plus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
This chapter includes procedures for commissioning both non-protected and protected
terminals.

Commissioning a Non-protected Terminal


This section assumes that the XP4 Plus radio terminal has been successfully installed,
following the instructions provided in Chapter 2.
An XP4 Plus radio terminal may be set up on the bench, without the remote terminal,
using the simple steps outlined in Setting XP4 Parameters on page 3-5. Due to the
software configuration of the XP4 Plus, these steps should take no longer than five
minutes.
If commissioning the terminal as part of a link, following installation verify that antennas
at either end are aligned and pointing directly at each other. See Aligning Antennas on
page 3-17 for more information.

Required Tools
The following tools are needed to commission the XP4 Plus. None are supplied by Stratex
Networks.
• Voltmeter
• BNC cable for connection to ODU AGC monitoring point
• Tool for securing the antenna azimuth and elevation adjustment mechanisms

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–1


Commissioning the XP4 Plus

Precautions
For your personal safety, observe the following precautions when handling, installing, or
replacing ODUs:

• Switch off the IDU and disconnect the IDU/ODU cable from the ODU before remov-
ing the ODU.
• Avoid exposure to microwave energy. Refer to IEEE Standard C95.1 (1991): Safety
levels with respect to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields are
3 kHz to 300 GHz.

Checking Connections
Ensure that the following connections are made to the IDU before applying power. See
Installing the Cable on page 1-12 for specific cable preparation procedures. See
Figures 3-1 through 3-4 for connection illustrations.

• IDU chassis ground


• ODU cable
• ODU ground cable
• ODU surge arrestor
• MSU, SU, or protection switch to IDU DB9 connector cables
• MSU/SU chassis ground
Warning: Never connect or disconnect the ODU or protection cables when
the IDU is on!
The following traffic cables can be connected after powering up:

• BNC for unbalanced E3 and DS-3 systems


• DB25 for unbalanced/balanced 2x/4x, 4x/8x, and 16E1 systems
Chassis Protection
Port RJ45 Connectors for Network
Ground Management Interface
3.15A Slo- DB25 Female
Traffic Connector (NMI) Option
Blow Fuse
AUX 1 AUX 2 TRIBS 5-8
U

M
L
IDU
OD
ON

CB
RE

MGMT 1 VT100
ALARMS
PROTECTION
R
R
Y

E TE

TE
FG
WE

IN
CIT
EQ

US PU

L
K ID

Computer
CT

MO
CA R /

ED
IB C

CA
PO

SE /
FR

IN OM
PA

GG
LE
L
BE

PIN

RE
LIN

LO
RS

TR

C
Tx
Tx

LO

ODU ALARM RELAYS TRIBS 1-4 MGMT 2 10BT

3-Pin Power DB9 Female RS232


Connector N-Type ODU DB15 Female Alarm Relay Output Connection for PC
Connector & External Input Connector Running LinkView

Figure 3-1. 2x/4x IDU Front Panel Connectors

3–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Commissioning a Non-protected Terminal

Chassis Protection
Port RJ45 Connectors for Network
Ground Management Interface
3.15A Slo- DB25 Female
Traffic Connectors (NMI) Option
Blow Fuse
AUX 1 AUX 2 TRIBS 5-8

M
L
IDU
OD
ON

CB
RE
MGMT 1 VT100
ALARMS
PROTECTION

R
R
Y

E TE

TE
PIN G
WE

IN
CIT
EQ

US PU

L
K ID

CT
Computer

MO
CA R /

ED
IB C

CA
PO

SE /
FR

IN OM
PA

GG
LE
L
BE

RE
LIN

LO
RS

TR

C
Tx
Tx

LO
ODU ALARM RELAYS TRIBS 1-4 MGMT 2 10BT

3-Pin Power DB9 Female RS232


Connector N-Type ODU DB15 Female Alarm Relay Output Connection for PC
Connector & External Input Connector Running LinkView

Figure 3-2. 4x/8x IDU Front Panel Connectors

Chassis Protection RJ45 Connectors for Network 3


Ground Port Management Interface
3.15A Slo- BNC Traffic (NMI) Option
Blow Fuse
Connectors
Aux 1
MGMT 2 10BT
ODU
TX RX
Alarm Relays Aux 2 Protection Computer

MGMT 1 VT100

DB15 Female Alarm Relay Output DB9 Female RS232


3-Pin Power & External Input Connector Connection for PC
Connector N-Type ODU Running LinkView
Connector

Figure 3-3. E3 and DS-3 IDU Front Panel Connectors

BNC Cables DB9 Cable

IDU

MSU
Customer Data IDU-MSU
Connectors E3 Receive Communications

E3 Transmit

Figure 3-4. 16E1 IDU/MSU Front Panel Connectors

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–3


Commissioning the XP4 Plus

Based on customer requirements, the following connections may also be made to the IDU:

• Network Management Interface (NMI)


• Protection system
• Auxiliary data channels
• Alarm relays and external alarm input sensors may be connected to other monitoring
equipment at the site.
Caution: Measure the voltage on the DC power connector before it is
connected to the IDU. Figure 3-5 shows the connector pinout.

Applying Power
Once proper connections have been verified, apply power to the IDU by connecting the
energized power connector.

Figure 3-5. IDU Power Connector


Caution: Measure the voltage on the DC power connector before it is
connected to the IDU. Figure 3-5 shows the required power
connector pinout.
The XP4 Plus will now begin the start-up self-diagnostic sequence. If the XP4 Plus does
not appear to power up, check the applied voltage and replace the fuse if necessary with
one of the 3.15A 20 mm slow-blow fuses provided in the IDU Installation Kit.

Initial Power-up
When an ODU/IDU pair is powered up for the first time, the following sequence will
apppear on the front panel display of the IDU:
IDU software version odu? ODU software version install

1 The IDU software version will display, followed by “odu?” while the system performs
a self-check for ODU/IDU compatibility.
2 If the IDU and ODU are properly connected, the ODU software version will appear,
followed by “install.”

3–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Commissioning a Non-protected Terminal

3 If “odu?” remains on the display after a few seconds, verify that the ODU is present and
check continuity of the IDU/ODU cable connection.

Subsequent Power-up
On subsequent power-ups:

• A walking dot (a dot moving left to right across the display) will appear after the sys-
tem has completed its self-diagnostics. The “install” message will no longer display.
The walking dot indicates that all self-checks have been performed and that the system
is ready to operate.
• ODU/IDU pairs are tested together at the factory before being shipped to the customer,
or at the pre-installation test depot. If the same pair is installed as a terminal in the
field, only the walking dot display will appear initially, indicating that the system is
fully operational (and ready to configure if necessary).
Note: If “Err1” appears on the IDU front panel display, the Radio Frequency 3
Plan is not compatible with the connected ODU. Contact the Stratex
Networks Help Desk for assistance.
• Anytime a new or different ODU is connected to an IDU, the “install” message will
appear and the installation/commissioning process must be performed.
Caution: Once power has been applied to the IDU, the N-type connector
marked “ODU” on the IDU front panel will be energized. Ensure
that the power is off before connecting or disconnecting cable to
the IDU or ODU.

Setting XP4 Parameters


When an IDU/ODU pair is powered up together for the first time, the operator must
establish the parameters for the radio. The following checklist (Table 3-1) includes the
steps that must be followed and where to find detailed instructions for each step. The
operator is prompted to input these parameters when the IDU front panel LED displays
“install.”

To subsequently alter the XP4 Plus configuration, the operator simply logs in to the XP4
Plus front panel and selects the desired function directly, skipping any functions that do
not require alteration. See “Chapter 4, Configuring the XP4 Plus,” for a more detailed
account of keypad operations and other common post-installation procedures.

Table 3-1. Setting the Parameters of the XP4 Plus

To set the XP4’s parameters . . . For instructions, see . . .

1. Log in. Logging In to the IDU Keypad on page 4-9.

2. Set traffic (BER) capacity. Viewing BER and Configuring Traffic (BER)
Capacity on page 4-11.

3. Set transmit frequency. Configuring the Transmit Frequency (Tx FREQ)


on page 4-13.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–5


Commissioning the XP4 Plus

Table 3-1. Setting the Parameters of the XP4 Plus

To set the XP4’s parameters . . . For instructions, see . . .

4. Set transmit power. Configuring the Transmit Power (Tx PWR) on page
4-15.

5. Select link ID code. Configuring the Link ID Code on page 4-15.

6. Set tributary configurations. Viewing/Changing Tributary Configurations


(TRIB CFG) on page 4-16.

7. Log out. Logging Out on page 4-18.

3–6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Commissioning a Protected Terminal

Commissioning a Protected Terminal


This section assumes that the XP4 Plus radio terminal has been successfully installed,
following the instructions provided in Chapter 2. Instructions for commissioning a non-
protected terminal are provided at the beginning of this chapter.

Selecting a Protection Mode


The protection switch monitors both direct-mount XP4 Plus terminals. When an alarm
status changes in either terminal, the switch makes a decision as to which of the two XP4
Plus terminals should be online (carrying traffic). For 2x/4x/8x systems, both the transmit
and receive functions of the terminal switch at the same time to the redundant terminal.
For E3/DS-3/16E1 systems, the transmit and receive functions switch separately with

3
hitless receive switching to support the Space Diversity protection mode.

2x/4x and 4x/8x systems provide a choice between Hot Standby or Frequency Diversity.
E3, 16E1, and DS-3 systems provide a choice between Hot Standby/Space Diversity and
Frequency Diversity modes using a two-position rocker switch. LEDs clearly indicate the
switch setting. Figure 3-6 identifies the protection switch LEDs and switches for an E3/
16E1/DS-3. Figure 3-7 identifies the protection switch LEDs and switches for a 2x/4x/8x
system.

Figure 3-6. E3/DS-3/16E1 SU/MSU Components

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–7


Commissioning the XP4 Plus

Figure 3-7. 2x/4x/8x Protection Switch Components

8x systems offer the Dual Link protection mode, which also serves as a semi-protected
16x on two separate frequencies, similar to Frequency Diversity mode.

For maintenance purposes, either XP4 Plus terminal may be manually switched online
using a three-position front-panel-mounted rocker switch. LEDs clearly indicate which
XP4 Plus terminal is online and whether the redundant system controller is in auto or
manual switch mode. Accidental switching is prevented by “guard rails” fixed on either
side of the rocker switches. Using LinkView, the IDU front panel can also be locked,
preventing any accidental changes to the system.

Protection Mode Options


Before applying power to the system, use the rocker switch located on the right side of the
shelf of the protection switch front panel to select the relevant protection mode of
operation. Select “A” online using the three-position rocker switch located on the
protection switch front panel.
Note: Both Tx and Rx switches on E3, 16E1, and DS-3 systems must be
switched into either A, B, or Auto.
Consult your planning document to see which of the following protection options applies
to your system:

Hot Standby (HSB)


Both terminals are set to the same frequency, but one terminal’s transmitter is muted to
prevent interference.

3–8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Commissioning a Protected Terminal

Frequency Diversity
Both terminals’ transmitters are powered on, but use different frequencies to avoid
interference.

Dual Link (8x Systems)


Both terminals are fully functioning, using different frequencies to provide 16 tributaries
under normal operation (no fault). A fault detected in traffic of tributaries 1 through 8
results in an automatic switch of those tributaries to the standby radio, disabling tributaries
9 through 16. A fault detected in tributaries 9 through 16 generates an alarm, but no
switching will occur, as the first eight tributaries are considered primary.

Space Diversity (E3, 16E1, and DS-3 Systems)


The main and standby radios are set up in Hot Standby mode, but are connected to their
own antennas. The spatial separation of the antennas, combined with hitless receive
switching, provides the Space Diversity function on the receiving end of the link.
3

Protection Switch LED Summary


The LEDs on the protection switch provide the following information:

Tx/Rx A or B

Green Online and no alarms

Flashing Green Offline and no alarms

Red Offline and alarmed

Flashing Red Loss of communications signal from IDU

Orange Forced online and alarmed

Tx/Rx/Auto

Green Active

OFF Not active

Hot Standby/Frequency Diversity/Dual Link/Diversity Mode

Green Active

OFF Not active

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–9


Commissioning the XP4 Plus

Commissioning in Hot Standby Protection Mode


Warning: Verify that all interconnect cables are installed and properly
connected before powering up.
From the front panel of the protection switch:

1 Move the protection rocker switch to Hot Standby mode.


2 Power up both IDU A and IDU B.
3 Set both the transmit (TX) and receive (RX) rocker switches (see Figure 3-6) to A.
4 Set IDU A traffic capacity, transmit frequency, transmit power, link ID code, and
tributary configuration according to the instructions in Viewing and Changing Current
Settings on page 4-9.
5 Align the antenna following the instructions provided in Aligning Antennas on
page 3-17.
6 Set both the TX and RX rocker switches to B.
7 Set IDU B traffic capacity, frequency, transmit power, link ID code and tributary
configuration according to the instructions in Viewing and Changing Current Settings
on page 4-9.
Note: The configuration of both the upper and lower XP4s, except for
transmit power, must be identical for correct system operation.
8 Set both the TX and RX rocker switches back to A, then to AUTO function.
The LEDs for IDU A should be solid green. The LEDs for IDU B should be green,
except for the green/red flashing LED on the ODU, indicating that it is functional and
standing by. The diagram below shows the LED status for the IDUs and the protection
switches (both E3/DS-3/16E1 and 2x/4x/8x systems).

3–10 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Commissioning a Protected Terminal

The Hot Standby Protection System is now ready to carry traffic.


Note: If you make future changes to the link ID or frequency for a
protected, direct-mount system, see the following section for the
correct procedure.

Changing the Link ID Code for a Protected System


• For E3, 16E1, and DS-3 systems, when you change the frequency or link ID to the
online radio, the change happens automatically to the offline radios. For example, if
you change the link ID for the online local IDU from 1 to 2, the online remote IDU, the
offline remote IDU, and the offline local IDU all make corresponding changes from 1
to 2.
• For 2x/4x or 4x/8x systems, any change to the frequency or link ID of the online IDU
must be duplicated manually for the offline local IDU. For example, if you change the
link ID for the online local IDU from 1 to 2, the online remote IDU and the offline
remote ODU both automatically make a corresponding change. The offline local IDU
3
does not.

To manually change the link ID:


1 Log in to the IDU keypad. See Logging In to the IDU Keypad on page 4-9 for
instructions. You will need a PIN to access the keypad, which was specified on the radio
configuration sheet. The PIN can be changed using LinkView, but cannot be changed
through the front panel.
2 Press the SELECT key until the green LINK ID LED is lit.
3 Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to select the desired Link ID Code (2 in this example).
4 Press the ENTER key to accept the change. The IDU will beep and display the new
Link ID Code setting.
5 When finished, press the SELECT key until the green PIN/LOGOUT LED is lit and
then press ENTER to logout.

Commissioning in Frequency Diversity Mode


Warning: Verify that all interconnect cables are installed and properly
connected before powering up.
1 Move the protection rocker switch to Diversity (Frequency Diversity for 2x/4x/8x
systems).
2 Power up IDU A only.
3 Set both the transmit (TX) and receive (RX) rocker switches to A.
4 Set IDU A’s traffic capacity, frequency, transmit power, link ID code, and tributary
configuration according to the instructions in Viewing and Changing Current Settings
on page 4-9.
5 Align the antenna following the instructions provided in Aligning Antennas on
page 3-17.
6 Power up IDU B and select B online using the three-position rocker switch located on
PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–11
Commissioning the XP4 Plus

the protection switch front panel.


7 Set IDU B’s traffic capacity, frequency, transmit power, link ID code, and tributary
configuration according to the instructions in Viewing and Changing Current Settings
on page 4-9.
Note: The setup of the lower XP4 Plus must be identical to the upper except
for the frequency channel. Frequencies used on “A” and “B”
terminals must be different for the system to operate. Frequencies
are assigned by the customer’s frequency planning department.
Transmit power levels may also differ if an unequal coupler is used to
combine the ODUs at the antenna. For instance, the transmit power
for ODU B may have to be set to a higher level if ODU B is connected
to the coupled port. This ensures that the resulting transmit power
levels at the antenna port are equal.
8 Set both the TX and RX rocker switches back to A, then to AUTO function.
9 The LEDs for both IDU A and B should be solid green, indicating that both links are
active and carrying traffic. The diagram below shows the LED status for the IDUs and
the protection switches (both E3/DS-3/16E1 and 2x/4x/8x systems).

The Frequency Diversity Protection System is now ready to carry traffic.

3–12 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Commissioning a Protected Terminal

Commissioning in Dual Link Protection Mode


(8x only)
Warning: Verify that all interconnect cables are installed and properly
connected before powering up.
1 Move the protection rocker switch to Dual Link (applies to 8x systems only).
2 Power up IDU A only.
3 Set the online rocker switch to A.
4 Set IDU A’s traffic capacity, frequency, transmit power, link ID code, and tributary
configuration for channels 1 through 8 according to the instructions in Viewing and
Changing Current Settings on page 4-9.
5 Align the antenna following the instructions provided in Aligning Antennas on
page 3-17.
3
6 Power up IDU B and select B online using the three-position rocker switch.
7 Set IDU B’s traffic capacity, frequency, transmit power, link ID code, and tributary
configuration for channels 9 through 16 according to the instructions in Viewing and
Changing Current Settings on page 4-9.
Note: The setup of the lower XP4 Plus must be identical to the upper except
for frequency. Frequencies used on “A” and “B” terminals must be
different for the system to operate. Frequencies are assigned by the
customer’s frequency planning department.
8 Set the three-position rocker switch to AUTO.
The LEDs for both IDU A and B should be solid green, indicating that both links are
active and carrying traffic. The diagram below shows the LED status for the IDUs and
the protection switch.

9 Connect all four DB25 traffic connectors on the protection switch.


The Dual Link System is now ready to carry traffic.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–13


Commissioning the XP4 Plus

Commissioning in Space Diversity Mode


(E3, DS-3 and 16E1 systems only)
Space Diversity requires the dual ODU/dual antenna configuration shown below.

Figure 3-8. ODU Protection Configuration using Dual Antennas

Warning: Verify that all interconnect cables are installed and properly
connected before powering up.
1 Move the protection rocker switch to Hot Standby.
2 Power up both IDUs.
3 Set both the transmit (TX) and receive (RX) rocker switches to A.
4 Set IDU A’s traffic capacity, frequency, transmit power, link ID code, and tributary
configuration according to the instructions in Viewing and Changing Current Settings
on page 4-9.
5 Align the antenna following the instructions provided in Aligning Antennas on
page 3-17. The typical separation for dual antennas is 50 to 75 feet (15.24 to
22.86 meters).
6 Power up IDU B and select B online using the three-position rocker switch located on
the protection switch front panel.
7 Set IDU B’s traffic capacity, frequency, transmit power, link ID code, and tributary
configuration according to the instructions in Viewing and Changing Current Settings
on page 4-9.
8 Align the antenna for IDU B following the instructions provided in Aligning
Antennas on page 3-17.

3–14 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Operations

Note: The setup of both the lower and upper XP4 must be identical for
correct system operation. Transmit power levels may differ,
however, if an unequal coupler is used to combine the ODUs at the
antenna. For instance, the transmit power for ODU B may have to be
set to a higher level if ODU B is connected to the coupled port (6 dB).
This ensures that the resulting transmit power levels at the antenna
port are equal.
9 Set both the TX and RX rocker switches back to A, then to AUTO function.
The LEDs for the upper IDU should be solid green. The LEDs for the lower IDU
should be green, except for the green/red flashing LED on the ODU, indicating that it
is functional and standing by. The diagram below shows the LED status for the IDUs
and the protection switch.

The Space Diversity Protection System is now ready to carry traffic.

Operations

Switching Conditions for 2x/4x/8x Protected


Systems
The protected system provides link continuity in the event that a fault occurs in the
primary radio. The switch is activated by an alarm condition in the primary link. Refer to
Discrete Alarm Descriptions on page 7-6 for detailed alarm descriptions. The alarm
conditions listed in Table 3-2 will trigger a switch from the primary to the secondary IDU,
activating both transmit and receive functions:.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–15


Commissioning the XP4 Plus

Table 3-2. 2x/4x/8x Alarms and Switching Functions


Alarm Switching Function Activated

Loss of lock on transmit signal Transmit and Receive

Loss of transmit power Transmit and Receive

Frame loss Transmit and Receive

BER alarm Transmit and Receive

Loss of IDU transmit signal Transmit and Receive

DC power loss Transmit and Receive

Cable fault Transmit and Receive

Loss of tributary input to primary IDU (between Transmit and Receive


switching unit and IDU)

While in Hot Standby mode, the protection switch will not switch to an offline link that
has a different link ID or different capacity than that of the primary link.

Switching Conditions for E3, DS-3, and 16E1 Systems


The E3, DS-3, and 16E1 protected systems have separate transmit and receive switches,
which are triggered by different alarms. The receive switch is hitless, sending the frame
with the best quality to the customer.

Table 3-3. E3, DS-3, and 16E1 Alarms and Switching Functions
Alarm Switching Function Activated

Loss of lock on transmit signal Transmit

Loss of transmit power Transmit

Frame loss Receive

BER alarm Receive

Loss of IDU transmit signal Transmit

DC power loss Transmit and Receive

Cable fault Transmit and Receive

Loss of tributary input to primary IDU (between Transmit


switching unit and IDU)

3–16 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Aligning Antennas

Table 3-3. E3, DS-3, and 16E1 Alarms and Switching Functions
Alarm Switching Function Activated

Loss of tributary output (between switching unit and Receive


IDU)

Loss of downlink signal from ODU to IDU Receive

RSL alarm Receive

Loss of E3/DS-3 data from IDU Receive

Aligning Antennas 3
To install the antenna, follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer, which should
be packaged with the antenna. The antenna can be aligned in one of two ways. Alignment
aid is available through the IDU or through AGC voltage measurements taken at the ODU.

Before aligning antennas, ensure that the transmit power is turned on and the correct link
ID, capacity, and frequency on both sides of the link have been set according to the radio
configuration sheet.

Aligning with the IDU


If you choose to use the IDU, follow these steps:
1 Consult the path calculation (pre-planning) document to learn the desired RSL
(received signal level) for the link.
2 Use the IDU’s SELECT key to access the RSL/Alarm LED on the front-panel display.
Compare the dBm reading there against the desired RSL in the path document.
3 Adjust the antenna alignment until the peak RSL appears on the LED display. Compare
the peak RSL to the RSL recorded on the radio configuration sheet.

Aligning with the ODU


Two alignment aids are available in the ODU:

• For fine alignment, a voltmeter can be used to measure AGC voltage through the BNC
connector on the ODU.
• When the ODU BNC weatherproof cap is removed, the ODU will emit an audible
“chirping” to aid antenna alignment. The rate of chirps is proportional to the AGC
voltage and therefore the receive signal level. The faster the rate of chirps, the stronger
the RSL.
Follow the steps in “AGC Voltage Optimization” below to align the antenna with the
ODU.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–17


Commissioning the XP4 Plus

AGC Voltage Optimization


The tools required to fine-align the XP4 Plus terminals using the ODU AGC function are:

• Appropriate tool to adjust the antenna’s azimuth and elevation mechanism securings
• Voltmeter
• Cable for connection between ODU monitoring point (BNC) and voltmeter
The voltage on the ODU BNC is calibrated so that 1.0 Vdc ≡ -80 dBm and that each
additional 0.1 Vdc increase thereafter corresponds to 1 dBm increase in RSL as follows:

Table 3-4. BNC Voltage and RSL Relationship

Units Measurement

BNC (Vdc) 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

RSL (dBm) -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30

Perform the following steps to fine-tune antenna alignment.

1 Remove the ODU BNC weatherproof cap (if not already removed from the previous
procedure).
2 Connect the voltmeter set to read DC volts (0-10) to the BNC connector on the ODU.
3 Loosen the azimuth on the antenna mount (horizontal angle).
Adjust azimuth position for maximum BNC voltage. Locate maximum voltage by
“peaking” or rotating the antenna in azimuth so as to pass through the maximum volt-
age. This ensures that the antenna is not mistakenly aligned to a side lobe.
4 Tighten azimuth adjustment securing mechanism, making sure that the voltmeter
reading does not drop as the securing mechanism is tightened.
5 Loosen the elevation (vertical position).

3–18 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Aligning Antennas

Antenna Alignment Using AGC/RSSI

Main
~3 dB

1st 1st

2nd
3
2nd

Antenna Alignment Signal

Adjust elevation position for maximum BNC voltage. Locate maximum voltage by
“peaking” or rotating the antenna in elevation so as to pass through the maximum volt-
age. This ensures the antenna is not mistakenly aligned to a side lobe.
6 Tighten elevation adjustment securing mechanism, making sure that the voltmeter
reading does not drop as the securing mechanism is tightened.
7 Use the information given above to calculate RSL from BNC voltage. Taking into
consideration the path conditions on the day of alignment, verify that the RSL is within
acceptable limits of that predicted for specific path distance, power settings, antenna
used, etc.
Note: As a guide, the RSL measured should be within ±6 dB of the predicted
value (+ 3 dB for transmit, + 3 dB for receive). For any greater
discrepancy, it is recommended the antennas be realigned and if
necessary, the path resurveyed.
A discrepancy of 20 dB or greater between the measured and
calculated RSL may be the result of either the antennas being aligned
on their side lobes or a polarization mismatch. Check polarization and
re-align if necessary. After the RSL has been optimized, remove the
voltmeter cable.
8 Replace the ODU BNC weatherproof cap.
Warning: Failure to replace the weatherproof cap may result in damage to
the ODU! Ensure that all the IDU summary alarms are off and the
expected RSL is displayed on the IDU.
The XP4 Plus terminal is now fully aligned and ready to carry operational traffic.

If required, record RSL and/or BNC voltage in the site maintenance log.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 3–19


1

Configuring the XP4 Plus


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
.. 4
.
The XP4 Plus radio can be configured using one of two tools—LinkView, a Windows-
based application, or the front panel of the IDU. Table 4-1 shows the key features
available through LinkView compared to those available through the speed keys on the
IDU front panel. Accessible features apply to both local and remote XP4 Plus terminals
unless marked.

Table 4-1. LinkView vs. Front-Panel Access

Feature Accessible via Accessible via IDU


LinkView Speed Keys

RSL 9 9

BER 9 9

Capacity 9 9

Transmitter Output Power / 9 9


Mute

Frequency/Channel 9 9

Link ID 9 9

Tributary Alarm Inversion 9 9

Tributary Line Coding 9 9


(T1 only)

Tributary In-Service Status 9

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 4–1


Configuring the XP4 Plus

Table 4-1. LinkView vs. Front-Panel Access

Feature Accessible via Accessible via IDU


LinkView Speed Keys

Site Name 9

Corporate Name 9

AIS Insertion Conditions 9

Relay Configuration 9

Password Configurations 9

XP4Plus IDU Front Panel 9


Enabling

Monitor Log Enabling 9

Software Downloading 9

Frequency Plan Editing 9

RF Loopback* 9

ODU Loopbacks* 9

Tributary Loopbacks 9

FEC Enabling* 9

Modulation Enabling* 9

Scrambler/Descrambler 9
Enabling*

ATPC Activation 9 9

Alarm Reporting 9

Access to NMI option card for 9


IP address configuring

Protected system switch 9


status for local and remote
* Features are accessible for local radios only.

Using LinkView
LinkView software is available as an option for customers who want enhanced
configuration and maintenance tools and/or the convenience of maintaining a link through
a personal computer. LinkView is a 16-bit Windows program that runs on Microsoft
Windows 95, 98, 2000, and NT. It indicates the health of a link if a failure occurs in real
time.

The user can communicate with the radio through LinkView at three access levels: View
Only, Maintenance, and Administrator. The View Only level allows the user to view the

4–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using LinkView

parameters of the radio without the use of a password. Maintenance and Administrator
levels require unique passwords to allow the user to read and write parameters from and to
the radio. The Administrator level has more features available than the Maintenance level,
including the ability to download code, change active software versions, and perform
diagnostics for troubleshooting. The default maintenance PIN is 1234. The default
administrator PIN is 2345.

The specific features available through each of the three access levels are listed in
Table 4-2. The same level of access is provided to both local and remote terminals in a
working link.

Table 4-2. LinkView Access Levels and Available


Features

Feature View Only Maintenance Administrator

Active Alarm Status 9 9 9

Active Software 9

AIS Insert 9 9 9
4
Alarms (Configure) 9 9 9

Alarms (View) 9 View Only View Only

ATPC 9 9 9

BER 9 View Only View Only

Capacity 9 9 9

Channel Number Format 9 9 9

Code Download 9

Connecting to XP4Plus using Modem 9 9 9

Corporate Name 9 9 9

Edit File (Configuration File) 9

Edit Monitor List/Start Monitoring 9 9

Edit Passwords 9 9

Forward Error Correction 9

Frequency/Channel Configuration 9 9 9

Front Panel Access Restrictions 9

Line Build Out (DS-1 and DS-3 only) 9 9 9

Link ID 9 9 9

Loopbacks (RF, ODU & IDU) 9

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 4–3


Configuring the XP4 Plus

Table 4-2. LinkView Access Levels and Available


Features (Continued)

Feature View Only Maintenance Administrator

Loopbacks (Tributary) 9

Modulation ON/OFF 9

Protection Switch Front Panel Lockout 9 9 9

Protection Switch Status 9 9 9

Radio Frequency Plan editing 9 9

Radio Save (Configuration File) 9

Read Parameters (IDU, ODU) 9 9 9

Report Printing 9 9 9

RSL 9 View Only View Only

Scrambling ON/OFF 9

Site Name 9 9 9

SNMP Parameters 9 9 9

Status Bar Activation 9 9 9

Toolbar Activation 9 9 9

Transmitter Power Fine Adjust 9 9 9

Transmitter Power Mute 9 9 9

Tributary Data Input Alarm 9 9 9

Tributary Encoding 9 9 9

Tributary In-Service 9 9 9

View Monitor Log 9 9 9

4–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using the XP4 IDU Front Panel

Using the Appropriate Cable with LinkView


Each IDU is configured to use one of two types of cable to connect to LinkView—either a
straight serial cable or a null modem cable. After starting the LinkView application, the
Serial Port Connection dialog box will display:

This dialog box is used to select the communications port that connects LinkView to the
XP4. Unavailable ports are dimmed. If you are using the correct cable, this dialog box will
display with the Direct Connect button selected, one of the Com ports selected (e.g.,
Com 1), and the IDU’s serial number, hardware number, and software version displayed
(as shown in the sample).

If the Direct Connect button is not selected and no information is displayed, it may be
because you are using the wrong type of cable. Try switching to a different cable to
connect. The LinkView cable kit includes a serial cable and a null modem adapter. If you
are still experiencing problems, contact the Stratex Networks Help Desk.

To order LinkView, contact your Stratex Networks representative. A LinkView manual is


located on the LinkView CD installation disk in PDF format. A desktop help system is
also available for quick answers to your LinkView questions.

Using the XP4 IDU Front Panel


The keypad controls and LEDs on the IDU front panel will be used to maintain and
configure your XP4 Plus radio system. Together, they display unambiguous alarms and
give clear, real-time status of the operating link. In the example shown in Figure 4-1, the

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 4–5


Configuring the XP4 Plus

operator has used the Control keys to log in to the local terminal and access view and
configuration controls for Tx Power.

Figure 4-1. XP4 Plus Speedkeys and LEDs

Alarms
The five Alarm LEDs circled in Figure 4-2 (ON, IDU, ODU, CBL, and REM) show alarm
status. Refer to “Chapter 7, Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System” for a
complete description of alarms.

Figure 4-2. Alarm LEDs

4–6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using the XP4 IDU Front Panel

Table 4-3 lists each alarm LED and the type of problem that is indicated when the LED is
lit.

Table 4-3. Alarm LED Indicators

Alarm LED Type of Problem Indicated When Lit

ON BER and RSL alarms, loopback indicator

IDU Trib and frame loss alarms, ID code mismatch

ODU TX muted, capacity mismatch, TX power and TX/RX PLL


alarms

CBL Failed IDU/ODU communication

REM Remote terminal is in alarm state

The alarm LED color of the indicates:

• Green = OK
4
• Flashing Green/Red = Possible configuration error or minor alarm

• Red = Major alarm

Control Keys
Use the control keys (circled in Figure 4-3) to view or change settings for RSL/Alarm,
BER/MODE, Tx Frequency, Tx Power, Link ID, Tributaries, and to control system access
(log in and log out).

Figure 4-3. Control Keys

Specific key functions are as follows:

V IE W
Use the VIEW key in combination with the arrow keys to toggle between local and
remote terminal controls.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 4–7


Configuring the XP4 Plus

• The green LOCAL LED, when lit, indicates that the information displayed on the IDU
L
CA
LO
front panel is related to the local XP4 Plus.

TE

R
EM
O
• The orange REMOTE LED, when lit, indicates that the information displayed on the
IDU front panel is related to the remote XP4 Plus.
Use the SELECT key in combination with the arrow keys to access the configuration
SELECT setting (Tx frequency, Link Id, etc) that you want to view or change.

Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to scroll through various configuration options that are available
through the front panel.

After you have used the SELECT key and the arrow keys to configure or change a setting,
ENTER
press ENTER to execute your choice.

Front-Panel Display
The front-panel display window circled in Figure 4-4 gives read-out information on
configuration settings such as Tx Frequency, Link ID number, BER, etc. The LEDs
immediately below the display window serve as navigation aids as you use the control
keys to view or change configuration settings. For example, when you use the control keys
to view or change Tx power, the corresponding LED on the front-panel display changes to
green.

Figure 4-4. Front-Panel Display

User Information LEDs


The orange COMPUTER IN USE LED, when lit, indicates that a PC running the
LinkView software is connected to the LinkView port of the IDU.
Note: When this LED is lit, keypad operations at both ends of the link are
limited to viewing terminal configuration only.
When lit, the orange LOGGED IN LED indicates that the operator is logged in to the
IN
ED

XP4 Plus keypad.


GG
LO

4–8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Logging In to the IDU Keypad

Note: Operators cannot be logged in to both ends of the link


simultaneously.

Logging In to the IDU Keypad


To access the control features, you must enter a PIN on the keypad. The PIN is included
on the radio configuration sheet. The PIN, which can be up to six numeric digits, may be
changed using LinkView. It cannot be changed through the front panel.

Logging In for the First Time


After powering up the XP4 Plus, the front panel will display install. Press ENTER. The
PIN/LOGOUT LED will illuminate if a PIN is required. The factory default PIN used
unless the customer has requested otherwise is 1234.

To input a PIN:
1 Press SELECT until the LOG IN LED is lit. A dot will display on the left side of the
front-panel display window.
Note: If the window displays locd, either another operator is logged in to 4
the remote terminal keypad or a PC running LinkView is connected
to the LinkView port at the local or remote terminal. You cannot log
in to the local keypad until the other operator logs out.
2 Select the first digit of the PIN using the ↑ or ↓ keys. Press ENTER to input the digit.
3 Select the second digit of the PIN using the ↑ or ↓ keys. Press ENTER to input the
digit.
4 Enter the remaining digits in the same manner.
5 After the last PIN digit is entered, press ENTER again. If the PIN is correct, the IDU
will beep and the orange LOGGED IN LED will light.
The operator may now proceed to set up any or all of the control features using the
SELECT key to select the desired option.

Note: The XP4 logs the operator out of the front panel after a period of
inactivity longer than five minutes. To manually log out of the
session, select “pin/logout,” then press ENTER.

Viewing and Changing Current Settings


You can view configuration settings for the XP4 Plus radio without logging in to the IDU
keypad (if the keypad has not been previously locked out using LinkView). If you want to
change any of the configuration settings, however, you must log in first. To do so, follow
the steps outlined in the previous section, Logging In to the IDU Keypad.

The following sections include the procedures for viewing and/or changing specific
configuration settings.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 4–9


Configuring the XP4 Plus

Viewing the RSL/Alarm


If one of the alarm LEDs to the left of the display window is lit (see Figure 4-2), selecting
the RSL/Alarm mode gives you a way to pinpoint the problem.

To view the RSL and alarm conditions:


1 Press SELECT on the IDU’s front panel until the green RSL/Alarm LED is lit.The
front-panel display window gives a real-time indication of the receive signal level at the
ODU RF port in dBm (-30 to -80 dBm).
Note: If HiUncal appears in the display window, the receive level is above
the calibrated range of the radio. If LoUncal displays, the receive
level is below the calibrated range of the radio. For more information
on troubleshooting alarms, refer to “Chapter 7, Troubleshooting and
Maintaining the XP4 Plus System.”
2 If alarms are present, press the ↑ and ↓ keys to scroll through the active alarm
indicators.
3 Press VIEW to toggle between local and remote terminals.
When no alarms are present, the front-panel display will show only no AL. If alarms are
present, Table 4-4 lists the possible alarm messages that will appear in the display window.

Table 4-4. Alarms and Display Codes


Alarm Display Code

No Alarms no AL
Transmit Power AL tP
Transmit Frequency AL TF
Receive Level AL rSL
Receive Lock AL rLoC
Link ID Code AL id
BER Warning AL bErL
BER Alarm AL bErH
Cable Fault AL Cbl
Local Aux. Input AL Lau
Remote Aux. Input AL rAu
Frame Loss AL Fr
Trib 1 Fault AL Tr 1
Trib 2 Fault AL Tr 2
Trib 3 Fault AL Tr 3
Trib 4 Fault AL Tr 4
Trib 5 Fault AL Tr 5

4–10 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Viewing and Changing Current Settings

Table 4-4. Alarms and Display Codes (Continued)


Alarm Display Code

Trib 6 Fault ALTr 6


Trib 7 Fault AL Tr 7
Trib 8 Fault AL Tr 8
16E1 (E3 with a MSU):

Trib 9 Fault AL Tr 9
Trib 10 Fault AL Tr 10
Trib 11 Fault AL Tr 11
Trib 12 Fault AL Tr 12
Trib 13 Fault AL Tr 13
Trib 14 Fault AL Tr 14
Trib 15 Fault AL Tr 15
Trib 16 Fault AL Tr 16 4
E3/DS-3/16E1:

Trib Fault AL Tr
Downlink Loss AL dnl
No Customer Data AL Usr
E3/DS-3 LOS A E3 A
E3/DS-3 LOS B E3 B
AIS TO CUST AIS
E3 FRAME E3Fr

See Chapter 7, Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System, for more
information about pinpointing the cause of alarms and fixing the problem.

Viewing BER and Configuring Traffic (BER) Capacity


To view the BER (bit error rate) and traffic capacity (for 2x/4x and 4x/
8x systems only):

• Press SELECT on the IDU’s front panel until the green BER/CAPACITY LED is lit.
The front-panel display provides a real-time indication of received BER and the cur-
rent capacity setting and channel plan being used (alternate or normal).

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 4–11


Configuring the XP4 Plus

To view the BER (bit error rate) and mode:

• Press SELECT on the IDU’s front panel until the green BER/MODE LED is lit. The
front-panel display provides a real-time indication of received BER and the current
capacity setting and channel plan being used (alternate or normal).
For E3, 16E1, and DS-3 systems, the BER/MODE displays as E3, 16, or DS-3 for
1+0 (non-protected) systems and E3p, 16p, and DSp for 1+1 (protected) systems.
BER is displayed on the left side of the display in the format 0err if the BER is less than
-7 -7
1x10 . If the BER is higher than 1x10 , the current BER is displayed in the format
nE-n, indicating that a BER of n errors in 10n bits is being received. For example, if a
-6
BER of 4 errors in 10 bits is being received, the display will read 4E-6.

Capacity and current channel plans are displayed on the right side in the format nx, where
x is the capacity (i.e., 2 x 2.048 Mbps for 2E1 configuration) and “n” is the normal
channel plan. Capacity may be displayed as 2, 4 or 8; meaning 2x, 4x or 8x. The channel
plan may be “n” or “A”; meaning normal or alternate.
Note: Capacity is not selectable on E3, 16E1, and DS-3 systems.
Valid configurations are:

• For a 2x/4x XP4 Plus Series: n2, A2, n4

• For a 4x/8x XP4 Plus Series: n4, A4, n8


An “alternate” channel plan is used when operating at the lower of the two applicable
capacities. The alternate channel plan allows the operator to assign a frequency on the
channel plan normally associated with the next higher capacity. By assigning channels in
this way, there is no need for the operator to obtain new frequencies from their regulatory
authority, or change channels when upgrading link capacity.

Assignment of normal and alternate channel plans are pre-programmed defaults in the
factory. If required, they may be altered or deleted by the operator using the LinkView
software.
Note: Contact the Stratex Networks Help Desk for assistance with changing
frequency plans.

To change/upgrade traffic capacity:


Depending on the original customer order, terminals are capable of either 2x/4x or 4x/8x
operation. Upgrades from 2x to 4x or from 4x to 8x (or downgrades) can be executed from
the IDU keypad. The process below details how to upgrade a link operating in 2x
mode to operate in 4x mode. The same process applies to upgrading from 4x mode to
8x mode.
When changing capacity, the transmit frequency of the ODU will return to a center
frequency in the middle of the allowable tuning range. This frequency should be changed
to the one specificed in the radio configuration sheet.

1 Log in to the IDU keypad (see the PIN input steps on page 4–9 for instructions).
2 Press SELECT until the green BER/CAPACITY LED is lit. The LED will display
4–12 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual
Viewing and Changing Current Settings

-7
0Err n2, indicating that the link BER is <1x10 and that the channel plan in use is the
“normal” 2x channel plan.
Caution: Do not attempt this procedure if the link is running with a BER
indicated on the display. If this is the case, fix the BER problem
before attempting to upgrade capacity.
3 Use the ↑ key to select n4. This is 4x mode.
4 Press ENTER to accept the configuration change. Both the local and remote terminals
will switch to 4x mode.
5 Press SELECT until the green Tx PWR LED is lit. Notice that the transmitter was
muted (shown as off on the front-panel display) when the XP4 Plus link changed from
n2 to n4 mode. This prevents unwanted emissions.
Note: If the radio was working in A2 mode before the capacity upgrade to
n4 was initiated, there is no need to unmute the transmitters as the
channel plans used in both modes are the same.
6 Use the ↑ key to select the required transmitter power.
7 Press ENTER to accept the transmitter power. This action will unmute the transmitters
at both ends of the XP4 Plus link simultaneously. 4
8 Connect traffic to tributaries 3 and 4.
9 Check for alarms and then configure both tributaries (refer to the Viewing the RSL/
Alarm on page 4-10).
10 When finished, press SELECT until the green PIN/LOGOUT LED is lit. Then press
ENTER to log out. Traffic capacity is now changed on both ends of the link.
Note: Changing the capacity or channel plan setting will cause momentary
traffic disruption.
When upgrading traffic capacity from A2 to n4 or vice versa, the channel number and
frequency are not affected and the link remains operating at the new capacity. This is the
only type of capacity change recommended after a link has been installed.

Configuring the Transmit Frequency (Tx FREQ)


The XP4 Plus front panel will display the transmit frequency in either MHz (up to three
decimal places) or as a channel number (up to four digits in length), depending on the
customer’s selected configuration. The XP4 Plus will not let the operator tune to a
frequency outside the terminal’s tunable range.
When setting the radio’s parameters for the first time after installation, the transmit
frequency displayed on the front-panel is a center frequency, in the middle of the
allowable tuning range. The frequency should be set to the level specified on the radio
configuration sheet. If this frequency is not available, contact the Stratex Networks’ Help
Desk (see the Help Desk/Technical Support section of the Preface for contact
information).

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 4–13


Configuring the XP4 Plus

To view the Tx frequency:

• Press SELECT on the IDU’s front panel until the green Tx FREQ LED is lit. The
front-panel display shows the operating frequency of the channel in the middle of the
ODU range.

To view remote XP4 Plus Tx frequency:

• Press VIEW until the orange REMOTE LED is lit.

To change the Tx frequency:


1 Log in to the IDU keypad (see the PIN input steps on page 4–9 for instructions).
2 Press SELECT on the IDU’s front panel until the green Tx FREQ LED is lit.
3 Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to select the desired frequency.
4 Press ENTER to accept the change. The IDU will beep and display the new transmitter
frequency.
5 When finished, press SELECT until the green PIN/LOGOUT LED is lit. Press
ENTER to log out.
If the new frequency selected is susceptible to interference, both XP4 Plus terminals will
fall back to their original transmitter frequencies.
Note: Changing the frequency/channel setting will cause momentary
traffic disruption.
When an XP4 Plus local terminal’s transmitter frequency is changed in a working link, the
remote terminal will automatically make a corresponding change, assuming the both ends
of the link can communicate with one another. For 2x/4x and 4x/8x protected, direct-
mount systems, however, the frequency for the offline radio at the local terminal does not
automatically change when you change the frequency for the online radio. To change the
frequency for the offline radio, follow the instructions below.

To change the Tx frequency for offline 2x/4x and 4x/8x direct-mount,


protected radios:
1 Follow the steps above to change the frequency for the local, online radio. Both radios
(online and offline) at the remote end will automatically make a corresponding change
to the new frequency.
Three of the four radios in the link have now been changed to the new frequency.
2 To change the frequency for the fourth radio, go to the IDU for the offline, local radio
and use the front-panel controls to make the same frequency change. Press ENTER.
The frequency change for all four radios in the link is now complete.
Note: For E3, DS-3, and 16E1 systems, changing the frequency of the online
local or remote terminal automatically makes the same frequency
change to all four radios.

4–14 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Viewing and Changing Current Settings

Configuring the Transmit Power (Tx PWR)


XP4 Plus transmitter power is displayed in dBm, in variables of 0.5 dB from the terminal’s
maximum output power down to 30 dB below the maximum (to 20 dB for high-power
systems). The XP4 Plus will not let the operator select a value outside of the calibrated
range of operation.

To view Tx power:

• Press SELECT on the IDU’s front panel until the green Tx PWR LED is lit. The
front-panel display shows the transmitter output power currently in use.

To view remote XP4 Plus transmit power:

• Press VIEW until the orange REMOTE LED is lit.

To change Tx power:
Both local and remote XP4 Plus transmitter power may be adjusted in a working link from
the keypad.

1 Log in to the IDU keypad (see the PIN input steps on page 4–9 for instructions).
4
2 Press SELECT until the green Tx PWR LED is lit.
3 Press VIEW to display either the local or remote transmit power setting.
If off is displayed, the transmitter is muted. The transmitter is set to off as a default.
The transmitter can be turned off or muted by selecting the off option on the front-
panel display.
In a protected link, one of the radios is normally muted. Unmuting the radio will cause
major link interference and a link outage.
4 Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to select the desired transmit power. Each key press changes the
transmitter power display in 0.5 dB increments.
Note: The XP4 Plus only allows the operator to change power to values
within its range of calibration.
5 Press ENTER to accept the change. The IDU will beep and display the new transmitter
power.
6 When finished, press SELECT until the green PIN/LOGOUT LED is lit. Press
ENTER to log out.

Configuring the Link ID Code


Unique link codes for each installed link are required to help prevent interference. The
Link ID may be set to any value between 1 and 255.

To view the link ID code:

• Press the SELECT key on the IDU’s front panel until the green LINK ID LED is lit.
The front-panel display shows the default Link ID.
PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 4–15
Configuring the XP4 Plus

To change the link ID code:


1 Log in to the IDU keypad (see the PIN input steps on page 4–9 for instructions).
2 Press SELECT until the green LINK ID LED is lit.
3 Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to select the desired Link ID Code (1-255).
4 Press ENTER to accept the change. The IDU will beep and display the new Link ID
Code setting. The change is implemented simultaneously at both terminals in a working
link.
5 Press SELECT until the green PIN/LOGOUT LED is lit, then press ENTER to
logout.
When an XP4 Plus local terminal’s link ID is changed in a working link, the remote
terminal will automatically make a corresponding change. For 2x/4x and 4x/8x protected,
direct-mount systems, however, the link ID for the offline radio at the local terminal does
NOT automatically change when you change the link ID for the online radio. To change
the link ID for the offline radio, follow the instructions below.

To change the offline link ID for 2x/4x and 4x/8x protected direct-
mount radios:
1 Follow the steps above to change the link ID for the local, online radio. Both radios
(online and offline) at the remote end will automatically make a corresponding change
to the new ID number.
Link IDs for three of the four radios in the link have now been changed.
2 To change the fourth, go to the IDU for the local, offline radio and use the front panel
controls to enter the new number. Press ENTER.
The ID change for all four radios in the link is now complete.
Note: For E3, DS-3, and 16E1 systems, changing the link ID for the online
local or remote terminal automatically makes the same ID change for
all four radios.

Viewing/Changing Tributary Configurations


(TRIB CFG)
The tributary configurations display allows the operator to view the LOS (loss-of-signal)
detect function for each tributary. Tributary configurations can only be changed for 2x/4x,
4x/8x, and 16E1 systems.
Note: The tributary configuration is always set to normal for E3 and DS-3
systems and cannot be changed.

To view tributary configurations:

• Press SELECT on the IDU’s front panel until the green TRIB CFG LED is lit. The
front-panel display shows the tributary configuration information.

4–16 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Viewing and Changing Current Settings

To view remote tributary configurations:

• Press VIEW until the orange REMOTE LED is lit.


Depending on XP4 Plus setup, the display will show one of two codes:

• trib 1 n (see note below) means that tributary #1 is set to “normal” mode. In this
mode, an alarm will occur if the tributary is not receiving data. This is the configura-
tion used for tributaries that carry traffic.
• trib 1 I (see note below) means that tributary #1 is set to “inverted” mode. This mode
is set for unused tributaries, so that an alarm is generated when the tributary is receiv-
ing data.
Note: 4x/8x DS-1 systems will also display a data signal coding symbol. For
instance, trib 1 n A means that tributary 1 is set to normal with AMI
data signal coding, while trib 1 n b means that tributary 1 is set to
normal with B8ZS data signal coding.

To change the tributary configurations:

4
1 Log in to the IDU keypad (see the PIN input steps on page 4–9 for instructions).
2 Press SELECT until the green TRIB CFG LED is lit.
3 Press ENTER until the tributary to be configured is displayed (e.g., trib 1, trib 2,
trib 3, etc.)
4 Use the ↑ key to select whether the tributary LOS alarm is normal trib 1 n or inverted
trib 1 i.
5 Press ENTER to accept the change. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to configure the next tributary.
The IDU will beep and display the next tributary configuration setting.
6 Repeat the steps above until all trib alarms are properly configured.
7 When finished, press SELECT until the green PIN/LOGOUT LED is lit. Press
ENTER to log out.
Note: Changing the tributary configuration will not disrupt traffic.
Note: Applying data to a tributary whose LOS alarm has been set to “invert”
WILL cause a tributary LOS alarm. However, this change will not
disrupt traffic.

To adjust tributary settings for cable length:


The factory setting for cable length (trl n) is generally appropriate for cable lengths of
between 0 and 225 feet (approximately 70 meters) measured from the cross connect. An
additional setting (trl Lbn) is available, however, for DS-3 systems only for cable lengths
of between 226 and 450 feet (approximately 140 meters, measured from the cross
connect). If the connecting cable exceeds 225 feet, or if you get an input alarm or
experience constant or frequent synch loss, switching the setting to (trl Lbn) may resolve
the problem. To change the setting:

1 Press SELECT on the IDU to move the LED across to the TribCfg position.
2 Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to toggle between trl n (short) and trl Lbn (long).

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 4–17


Configuring the XP4 Plus

3 Press ENTER to activate your choice. The XP4 Plus terminal is now set up and running.
The operator may choose to log out of the keypad or leave it. If left inactive, the XP4
Plus will automatically log the keypad out after five minutes.
4 Set up the remote XP4 Plus terminal in the same manner as described above. When the
antennas are aligned, the XP4 Plus link will be ready to pass operational traffic.

Logging Out
After configuring the XP4 Plus, you may log out manually or just leave the keypad
inactive. After five minutes of inactivity, the XP4 Plus will automatically log out.

To log out of the system manually:


1 Press SELECT until the PIN/LOGOUT LED is lit.
2 Press ENTER to log out of the XP4 Plus. The IDU will beep and the orange LOGGED
IN LED will extinguish.

4–18 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


1

Configuring the Network Management


Interface Option
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
. 5
The Network Management Interface (NMI) offers SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) compatibility for management of the XP4 Plus terminals. By using ProVision or
any Management Information Base (MIB) browsing tool, the operator can monitor and
configure any radio terminal in a network from a single point. An NMI plug-in module is
used with connections to the IDU front panel.

The SNMP interface allows:

• Monitoring and management of all radio and network management alarms


• Radio and network management configuration
• Performance configuration and monitoring
• Security management and code download capability
Every manageable parameter, provided by the NMI interface, has an associated security
level. A three-level security access system (view, maintenance, administration) is
designed into the interface.

The NMI option is specified on the radio configuration sheet when the XP4 Plus radio is
ordered. The necessary processing hardware and memory required for network
management capability is included in the option board inserted at the back of the XP4 IDU
when it is assembled and tested at the factory.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 5–1


Configuring the Network Management Interface Option

The standard NMI option offers compatibility for management of radio systems. With the
use of ProVision, Stratex Network’s proprietary network management software, the
operator can view and configure any radio terminal in a network from a single point.

Other, less customized network management options include standard MIB browsers such
as HP Openview, SNMPc, or mg-soft.

The NMI option plug-in module, with connections included on the front panel of each
IDU, has the following interfaces:

• EIA RS232 VT100 configuration port on an RJ-45 socket


• 2 x EIA RS232/422/485 SNMP SLIP ports on RJ-45 sockets
• Ethernet 10 Base-T port on an RJ-45 socket
Legacy XP4 units may include RJ45s on the back of the card and/or a 10Base-2 BNC on
the option card.
For full details on the NMI option, contact your area’s Stratex Networks Sales
Representative (see the Help Desk/Technical Support section of the Preface for a list of
contact numbers).

Installing the NMI Option Card


If you have ordered a new XP4 unit with NMI, the NMI option board will already be
installed.

To install front-access NMIs:


Note: If you have an XP4 unit that is still under warranty and you want to
add the NMI option, return the unit to Stratex Networks or arrange
to have field personnel from Stratex Networks visit your site to install
the NMI option board.

Warning: If you install the board yourself, the warranty becomes void. See
the Help Desk/Technical Support section of the Preface for
Stratex Networks’ contact numbers.
A Phillips screwdriver is required to install NMI.

The following items are included with the NMI option:

• SNMP card

• Y ribbon cable

5–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Installing the NMI Option Card

If you have an XP4 radio that is no longer under warranty, follow the instructions below,
or on page 5-3 for a rear-access NMI, to install the NMI option board.
Caution: Never install the NMI option board until all power to the
IDU is turned off.
1 Power down the IDU and bring the unit to an ESD-protected area.
2 Remove the panel at the rear of the IDU using a Phillips screwdriver. Also remove the
screws holding the cover, and slide the cover away from the front panel. Two screws
are located under the warranty labels.
3 Install the ribbon cable (part number 145-000035-001) single-end connector into J6 on
the main board (see Figure 5-1 below).
4 Reinstall the cover using the screws you removed in step 1. Leave the double end with
connectors sticking out the backside through the opening in the cover.

J1
J2

J6 5

Figure 5-1. Connection for Front-Access NMIs

5 Install the ribbon connector into the NMI option board J1 and J2
(see Figure 5-1 above).
6 Plug the NMI option board into the slot with the 96-pin connector on the IDU main
board. Secure it using the remaining screws from step 1.
Refer to the next section, Configuring the NMI Option, for power up and initialize
instructions.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 5–3


Configuring the Network Management Interface Option

To install a rear-access NMI:


Caution: Never install the NMI option board until all power to the indoor
unit (IDU) is turned off.
1 Power down the IDU and bring it to an ESD-protected area. Use a Phillips-type
screwdriver to remove the panel at the rear of the indoor unit.
2 Plug the NMI option board into the slot with the 96-pin connector on the IDU board
(see Figure 5-2). Secure it using the screws you removed in step 1.

Figure 5-2. SNMP Connection for Rear-Access NMI

Refer to the next section, Configuring the NMI Option, for power up and initialize
instructions.

Configuring the NMI Option


The NMI option can be configured either through VT100 or LinkView. The instructions
for VT100 configuration are included below. The instructions for LinkView configuration
follow.

To configure the NMI option using VT100:


1 Power up and commission the IDU (refer to Chapter 3 for instructions).
2 Connect the VT100 terminal for initialization.
Use a straight RS 232 cable to connect the VT100 RJ45 port to an available Com port
on a VT100 terminal or a PC equipped with VT100 emulation software. Use the
VT100 port to complete the initial configuration of the SNMP ports. The VT100
pinout for DB9 to RJ45 conversion is shown in Figure 5-3.

5–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Configuring the NMI Option

3 Start the VT100 terminal or PC running VT100 emulation software (e.g.,


Hyperterminal) to begin SNMP configuration. (Any VT100 terminal or PC running a
VT100 emulation software can be used.)
Note: Microsoft Windows 3.1 is equipped with a VT100 emulation program
called Terminal. Windows 95, 98, 2000, and NT are equipped with a
program called Hyperterminal.
• If using a VT100 terminal, hit ENTER to begin NMI configuration.
• If using a PC, first configure the emulation software to use the chosen Com port
and the following COM port communication settings:
- Baud Rate—9600 bits/sec
- Data Bits—8
- Stop Bits—1
- Parity—None
- Flow Control—None
- Initial Modem Commands—None

Figure 5-3. VT100 RJ-45 to DB9 Adapter

4 Press ENTER to begin NMI configuration.


The initial Login screen should display. If not, press ENTER. The first time the system
is started, there will be no user accounts configured; the user will be logged on as a
“Super user” with modify access.
If there is still no response from Hyperterminal, check the cable and adapter connec-
tions and ensure that the NMI is installed and the green LED on the option card is lit.
5 Select option 5, Network Port Configuration from the Main Menu to configure
all applicable ports. (To select an option, enter the number corresponding to a menu
item. The screen will scroll and the selected sub-menu will display.)

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 5–5


Configuring the Network Management Interface Option

6 Select the option number of the port to configure. Refer to Tables 5-1 through
5-3 for a listing of the parameters associated with each port.
7 Select “S” after configuring each port to save all modifications.Select System
Configuration from the Main Menu.
8 Use the System Configuration Menu Options to set the system name, time, and date
along with other system parameters such as automatic logout time and reset status. Save
changes.
9 Reset the NMI card. Use the reset function provided in the VT100 program to reset the
card.
Note: Resetting the NMI saves the Ethernet and Serial port parameters you
just entered. If you do not reset the NMI, the changes will be lost.
10 Disconnect the VT100 connection.
11 Connect all network connections. The cable pinout diagrams for the cables used with
each port are defined in the next section, NMI Connection.
For more detailed set-up instructions for NMI, refer to the NMI Quickstart Guide.

To configure the NMI option using LinkView:


If the NMI option card is installed in the IDU, an SNMP tab will appear in the main
LinkView window (see graphic).

5–6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Configuring the NMI Option

For instructions on configuring the NMI option, refer to the LinkView Manual for XP4,
part number 840-600400-001.When configuring ports, refer to Tables 5-1 through
5-3 for a listing of the parameters associated with each port.

Table 5-1. Ethernet Port (10BT or UTP RJ-45)


Parameter Description

Ethernet (Mac) Address This address is the address associated with the Ethernet chip
on the circuit board. This address is programmed at the factory
and should not be changed.

Default Router IP Address IP Address of the network node which is the default router for
the Ethernet port. The network address must correspond to
the SNMP addresses of other network ports for the route to be
valid.

Default Router Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the default router.

IP Address The IP address for the Ethernet port.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the Ethernet port.

Trap Destination IP Address The IP address to which traps being sent out of the Ethernet
port will be sent.

Trap Generation Enables/disables trap generation via the Ethernet port.

Ethernet Connector Type Configures the Ethernet port to operate using the Twisted Pair
5
(rear access NMI) connection.

Booted Indicator Indicates whether or not the Ethernet port is initialized or not.
A port is not initialized until it is “booted”.

Note: For more information on IP addressing, see the Stratex Networks Standard Practices Guide and the NMI QuickStart Guide.

Table 5-2. Serial Management Ports


(MGMT1 and MGMT2)
Parameter Description

Default Router IP Address IP Address of the network node which is the default router for
the serial port. The network address must correspond to that of
the SNMP addresses of other network ports for the route to be
valid.

Default Router Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the default router.

IP Address The IP address for the serial management port selected.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the IP address.

Trap Destination IP Address The IP address to which traps being sent out of the serial
management port selected will be sent.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 5–7


Configuring the Network Management Interface Option

Table 5-2. Serial Management Ports


(MGMT1 and MGMT2) (Continued)
Parameter Description

Default Router IP Address IP Address of the network node which is the default router for
the serial port. The network address must correspond to that of
the SNMP addresses of other network ports for the route to be
valid.

Trap Generation Enables/disables trap generation via the serial management


port selected.

Other Serial Management Parameters

Baud Rate The baud rate at which the serial management port selected will
operate.

Interface Type Configures the serial management port selected as an RS232 or


RS422 connection.

Booted Indicator Indicates whether or not the selected serial management port is
initialized or not. A port is not initialized until it is “booted”.

Protocol Configures the protocol used over the serial management port
selected as SLIP or PPP.

Modem Type Determines the type of user string (if any) is sent out of the
serial management port selected upon initialization of the port.

Note:For more information on IP addressing, see the Stratex Networks Standard Practices Guide and the NMI QuickStart Guide.

Table 5-3. XP4 (Radio) Management Port


Parameter Description

Default Router IP Address The IP address of the network node which is the default router
for the XP4 Plus port. The network address must correspond to
that of the SNMP addresses of other network ports for the route
to be valid.

Default Router Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the default router.

IP Address The IP address for the XP4 (Radio) port.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the XP4 (Radio) port.

Trap Destination IP Address The IP address to which traps being sent out of the XP4 (Radio)
port shall be sent.

Trap Generation Enables/disables trap generation via the XP4 (Radio) port.

Booted Indicator Indicates whether or not the XP4 (Radio) port is initialized or
not. A port is not initialized until it is “booted.”

Note:For more information on IP addressing, see the Stratex Networks Standard Practices Guide and the NMI QuickStart Guide.

5–8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Configuring the NMI Option

NMI Connection
The NMI board connects through four RJ-45 connectors on the front panel of the IDU (see
Figure 5-4).

Chassis
Ground DB25 Female RJ45 Connectors for Network
3.15A Slo- Management Interface
Blow Fuse Traffic Connectors
(NMI) Option
Aux #1 Aux #2 Tribs 5-8
ODU MGMT 2 10BT

Alarm Relays Protection Tribs 1-4 Computer

MGMT 1 VT100

DB15 Female Alarm Relay Output DB9 Female RS232


3-Pin Power & External Input Connector Connection for PC
Connector N-Type ODU Running LinkView
Connector

Figure 5-4. NMI Connection—Front-Panel Access

On some older XP4 models, the NMI board connects through the rear-panel. Figure 5-5
shows the connections for rear-panel access,

Figure 5-5. NMI Panels for Rear & Front Access Modules

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 5–9


Configuring the Network Management Interface Option

SNMP Interface Cables


RJ-45 Ethernet Unshielded Straight Interface Cable
This cable is used to connect the SNMP Twisted-Pair (UTP) Ethernet port to an Ethernet
hub (RJ-45). Table 5-4 includes the pinout details.

Table 5-4. RJ-45 Ethernet Straight Cable Pinout


RJ-45 Port Pin Direction RJ-45 Hub Pin Direction
TPTX+ 1 output TPRX + 1 input
TPTX- 2 output TPRX - 2 input
TPRX+ 3 input TPTX + 3 output
TPRX- 6 input TPTX - 6 output

RJ-45 Ethernet Unshielded Crossover Interface Cable


This cable is used to connect the SNMP Twisted-Pair (UTP) Ethernet port to another data
port (RJ-45). Table 5-5 includes the pinout details.

Table 5-5. RJ-45 Ethernet Crossover Cable Pinout


RJ-45 Port Pin Direction RJ-45 Port Pin Direction
TPTX+ 1 output TPRX + 3 input
TPTX- 2 output TPRX - 6 input
TPRX+ 3 input TPTX + 1 output
TPRX- 6 input TPTX - 2 output

5–10 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Configuring the NMI Option

VT100 Interface Cable (DB9 Female)


This cable is used to connect the VT100 terminal or PC serial port (DB9 Female) to the
SNMP TERM Port. Table 5-6 includes the pinout details.

Table 5-6. VT100 Interface Cable DB9 Female Connector


DB9 Female RJ-45
Signal Pin Direction Pin Direction

RxD 2 input 2 output

PIN 5 PIN 1 TxD 3 output 3 input

RTS 7 output 7 input

PIN 9 PIN 6 CTS 8 input 8 output


DB9 Female
DSR 6 input 6 output

GND 5 - 5 -

DCD 1 input 1 output

DTR 4 output 4 input


RJ-45
5
Ethernet Port
The NMI is equipped with only one Ethernet port.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 5–11


Configuring the Network Management Interface Option

RS232 SLIP/PPP Interface Cable


This cable is used to connect the SNMP management system or PC serial port (DB9 or
DB25 Female) to the SNMP Serial MGMT1/MGMT2 (RJ-45) ports. Table 5-7 includes
the pinout details.

Table 5-7. RS232 SLIP/PPP DB9, DB25 Female Connector


DB9 DB25 RJ-45
Female Female
Signal Pin Direction Pin Direction Pin Direction

RxD 2 output 3 output 2 input

PIN 5 PIN 1 TxD 3 input 2 input 3 output

RTS 7 input 4 input 7 output

PIN 9 PIN 6 CTS 8 output 5 output 8 input


DB9 Female
DSR 6 output 6 output 6 input
13 1
GND 5 - 7 - 5 -

25 14 DCD 1 - 8 - 1 -

DB25 Female DTR 4 input 20 input 4 output

RJ-45

5–12 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Configuring the NMI Option

RS422 SLIP/PPP Interface Cable


This cable is used to connect the SNMP management system to the SNMP Serial
Management port. Table 5-8 includes the pinout details.

Table 5-8. RS422 Interface Cable DB25 Female Connector


DB25 Female RJ-45
Signal Pin Direction Pin Direction

RxD 2 input 2 output


13 1

TxD 3 output 3 input


25 14
RTS 7 output 7 input
DB25 Female
CTS 8 input 8 output

DSR 6 input 6 output

RJ-45

5
Serial-to-Serial Cable
This cable is used to connect an NMI serial port to another NMI serial port. Table 5-9
includes the pinout details.

Table 5-9. RJ-45 Ethernet Straight Cable Pinout


RJ-45 Pin Direction RJ-45 Pin Direction
RXD 2 input TXD 3 output
TXD 3 output RXD 2 input
GND 5 - GND 5 -

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 5–13


Configuring the Network Management Interface Option

5–14 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


1

Installing and Configuring


Other Options/Accessories
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
After you have installed the XP4 Plus, you are now ready to connect and configure any
additional equipment to the system to support various applications, including:

• Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) 6


• An Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU)
• Auxiliary Data Channels
• A Network Order Wire
• An Engineering Order Wire (EOW) Handset
• External Alarm Relay

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC)


Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is an optional feature that allows the output
power of the local transmitter to automatically adapt to changing path conditions based on
the remote Received Signal Level (RSL). For a complete description of the ATPC option,
see Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Option on page page 8–28.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 6–1


Installing and Configuring Other Options/Accessories

Activating ATPC
To activate ATPC on an XP4 Plus equipped with the ATPC option:
1 Log in to the IDU keypad (see the PIN input steps on page 4–9 for instructions).
To access the control features, you must enter a PIN on the keypad. The default PIN is
1234. The PIN, which can be up to six numeric digits, may be changed using Link-
View. It cannot be changed through the front panel.
2 Press SELECT until the green Tx PWR LED is lit.
3 Press VIEW to display the local power setting. To change the setting, use the ↑ and ↓
keys to select the desired transmit power. Press ENTER to accept the change. The IDU
will beep and display the new transmitter power.
4 Verify the remote RSL by toggling the ‘Local/Remote’ button and selecting RSL.
AtPC-XX will display. (XX is the baseline RSL that the system maintains.)
5 Turn AtPC on while viewing the remote Tx power.
6 If required, ATPC can also be activated on the remote transmitter from the local
terminal. Adjust the remote transmit power to achieve the desired local RSL.
7 When finished, press SELECT until the green PIN/LOGOUT LED is lit. Press
ENTER to logout.

De-Activating ATPC
1 Turn off ATPC by selecting the TX Power display and scrolling down until AtPC off
appears on the display.
2 Press ENTER.
The transmitter will remain at the level that was active prior to de-activating ATPC.
To fully de-activate ATPC, you must select AtPC off on both the local and remote ter-
minals independently.

The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU)


The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) is a compact, configuration-free, and easy-to-install
external module that transforms the XP4 Plus into an end-to-end wireless Ethernet
solution for ISP carriers and private network applications. For a complete description of
the EIU, see The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) on page 8–29.

6–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU)

Installing the EIU


The following accessories are included with the EIU installation kit:

• DC power connector
• Coaxial 75 ohm interconnect cable
• 3.15A 250V slo-blo fuses
• Rack mounting screws
• Rack mounting brackets
• Modem shelf
In addition to the 75 ohm interconnect cable that is included in the installation kit, two
additional cables may be required. Descriptions of all three cables are included below.

• 75 Ohm coaxial cable

• Crossover Ethernet 100 Base-T CAT 5 cable used to connect from the test port (RJ-45)
to another data port (RJ-45)
Pin
Pin 1
1
8 1
1 8

RJ-45 Port Pin Direction RJ-45 Port Pin Direction


TPTX+ 1 output TPRX + 3 input 6
TPTX- 2 output TPRX - 6 input
TPRX+ 3 input TPTX + 1 output
TPRX- 6 input TPTX - 2 output

• Straight 100 Base-T, CAT 5 cable used to connect from the data port (RJ-45) to an
Ethernet switch (RJ-45)
Pin
Pin NIC Interface Ethernet HUB 1
1
8 1
1 8

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 6–3


Installing and Configuring Other Options/Accessories

RJ-45 Port Pin Direction RJ-45 Hub Pin Direction


TPTX+ 1 output TPRX + 1 input
TPTX- 2 output TPRX - 2 input
TPRX+ 3 input TPTX + 3 output
TPRX- 6 input TPTX - 6 output

Note: A crossover cable is required if the pinout of the network port you’re
connecting to is identical to the pinout of the EIU data port.

To install the EIU:


1 Ensure that the radio link is installed and operating properly before installing the
Ethernet Interface Unit.
2 Install the unit in the shelf (either single or dual rack mount). Use minimum #14 (2.08
mm2 conductor) wire and suitable ground lugs to terminate ground between the EIU
ground post and the rack’s ground bus bar. Verify ground continuity with an ohmmeter.

Figure 6-1. Ethernet Interface Unit Shelf (EIU) Assembly

Prepare the Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) for self test. First connect coaxial and cross-
over cables to the unit (see Figure 3). Do NOT connect to the radio yet. Then apply
power to the EIU, which senses that the cables are connected and runs a self test..

LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6


3.15A 250V

+/-24 to 60Vdc

6–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU)

Note: During self test mode, if the LED colors do NOT match the colors
shown in Table 6-1, the unit has failed. Remove cables and return the
unit for repair.

Table 6-1. Self-Test LED Colors

LED Name Color

1 PWR Green
2 TRIB Green
3 Test Link Green
4 TEST Activity Blinking Yellow
5 DATA Link Green
6 DATA Activity Blinking Yellow

3 After verifying that LED lights show correct states, shut power off and remove
cablesEIU Test Configuration
4 Install the coaxial cables between the Ethernet Interface Unit and the IDU.
5 Use a proper Ethernet 100 Base-T cable to connect the EIU RJ 45 data port and your
network equipment.
6 Apply power (+/- 24 to 60Vdc) to the EIU.
Warning: This product meets global product safety requirements for safety
extra-low voltage (SELV) rated equipment. The input voltage
MUST be 24V or 48V nominal, 60V maximum. Where an external
main power supply unit is used to supply products, the supply
output must be guaranteed to remain within the safety extra-
low voltage (SELV) limits in the event of a single internal fault.
6
Installation Configurations
Set up of the EIU varies according to how the XP4 Plus links are configured.
Requirements for each configuration are included below.
Non-protected Links

• Only one EIU is required on each end of a link.


• The EIU connects to the DS-3/E3 interface on the XP4 Plus IDU.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 6–5


Installing and Configuring Other Options/Accessories

Fuse AUX 2

M
L
U
ON

OD
CB
RE
ID
MGMT 2 10BT ENTER SELECT VIEW
ALARMS
TX RX

TE
ER
Alarm Relays

B LM
Protection

RE AL
.

IN GED
E T
EQ
AUX 2

R.

MO
Computer

US P U
DE /

T
/A

IG
k ID
MO ER
Power

PW

CO RIB

OU
FR

C
IN OM

G
NF
L

LO IN /

LO
LO
Lin

CK
RS

TX

TX

C
P
ODU
MGMT 1 VT100

FUSE TX
RX

R
IB
TEST DATA

PW
TR
TRIB

Connect Ethernet
100Base-T cable here
Connect coaxial (straight or crossover,
cables here depending on pinout of
connecting network port)

Figure 6-2. Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) Non-protected


Configuration
Protected Links

• Only one EIU is required on each end of a 1+1 link.


• The EIU connects to the DS-3/E3 interface on the protection switch.

COMPUTER

COMPUTER

3.15A 250V
FUSE TX RX
R

IB

TEST DATA
PW

TR

TRIB
+/-24 to 60Vdc

Figure 6-3. Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) Protected


Configuration
Back-to-Back (Daisy-Chain) Links

• Back-to-back links are point-to-point links which pass traffic from one IDU to the next
without connection to other equipment.
• No EIU is required between back-to-back links—EIUs are only necessary at the inter-
face between the XP4 Plus IDU and the Ethernet Switch/Router.

6–6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Auxiliary Data Channels

Auxiliary Data Channels


The XP4 Plus Auxiliary Data Channels provide access to two 72 kbit/s overhead channels
between XP4 terminals in a link. The XP4 Plus Auxiliary Data Channels feature:

• One balanced (EIA RS422) and one unbalanced (EIA RS232) data channel
• Simultaneous use of both data channels
• A clock as well as data signal for each data channel
The data channel connections are on the IDU front panel. See Figures 6-4 and 6-5 below
for front-access connector locations.

Unbalanced RS232 Aux 1


Balanced RS422 Aux 2

Computer

Figure 6-4. IDU Auxiliary Data Channel Connectors on 2x/4x and 4x8x IDUs

Unbalanced RS232 Aux 1


Balanced RS422 Aux 2

Computer

6
Figure 6-5. IDU Auxiliary Data Channel Connectors on E3 or DS-3 IDUs

PIN 5 PIN 1

PIN 9 PIN 6
Figure 6-6. Data Ports #1 & #2 DB9 Pin Numbering
The pinouts of the data channels are detailed below:

Table 6-2. Unbalanced RS232 DB9 Pinout

Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description

1 TXC Transmit Clock Signal (O/P)


2 TXD Transmit Data Signal (O/P)
3 RXD Receive Data Signal (I/P)

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 6–7


Installing and Configuring Other Options/Accessories

Table 6-2. Unbalanced RS232 DB9 Pinout (Continued)

Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description

4 RXC Receive Clock Signal (O/P)


5 GND Ground
6 N/C Not Connected
7 N/C Not Connected
8 N/C Not Connected
9 DC +12V power for EOW Handset

Table 6-3. Balanced RS422 DB9 Pinout

Pin No. Signal Name Signal Description

1 RXC+ Receive Clock Signal + (O/P)


2 RXD- Receive Data Signal - (I/P)
3 TXD+ Transmit Data Signal + (O/P)
4 TXC+ Transmit Clock Signal + (O/P)
5 GND Ground
6 RXC- Receive Clock Signal - (O/P)
7 RXD+ Receive Data Signal + (I/P)
8 TXD- Transmit Data Signal - (O/P)
9 TXC- Transmit Clock Signal - (O/P)

6–8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Network Order Wire

Network Order Wire


The Network Order Wire unit provides a programmable full-function network call system
that features a programmable site identification number that service personnel can use to
communicate with all sites in a network. For a complete description, see The Network
Order Wire section on page page 8–30.

Figure 6-7. Network Order Wire

Installing the Network Order Wire


The following parts are included with each Network Order Wire unit:

• DC Power Connector
• 3.15A Slo-Blow Fuses
• Rack Mounting Screws
• Rack Mounting Brackets
• RS422 Interconnect Cables
• Modem Shelf 6
The Network Order Wire unit is rack mountable using the shelf bracket provided. The
Order Wire occupies less than half of one standard 19-inch shelf, allowing two units to be
mounted side by side. It requires +/- 24 to 60 Vdc and uses the same electrical connector
used on the XP4 Indoor Unit.

The Network Order Wire unit uses a standard touch-tone telephone and connects to the
RS422 auxiliary data port #2 on the front panel of the IDU (see Figure 6-8). with the
interconnect cables that are provided. The unit includes two parallel DB9 connectors for

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 6–9


Installing and Configuring Other Options/Accessories

each input port allowing easy connection with both protected (1+1) and non-protected
(1+0) links.

Figure 6-8. Network Order Wire Configuration

To install the Network Order Wire:


1 Connect a standard touch-tone telephone (available through Stratex Networks) to the
RJ11 “Telephone” connector on the face of the Order Wire.
2 Use the provided RS422 data cables to connect the Order Wire ports to the radio’s
Auxiliary Data Port 2.
When using the Order Wire in conjunction with protected links, the auxiliary data Port
#2 of each IDU is connected to the parallel connectors of either Port 1 or Port 2 on the
Order Wire. In addition, a second protected (1+1) or unprotected (1+0) link can be
connected to the second Order Wire port to achieve a daisy-chain configuration (see
Figures 6-9 and 6-10).

Figure 6-9. Non-protected (1+0) Daisy Chain Configuration

6–10 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Network Order Wire

Figure 6-10. Protected (1+1) Daisy Chain Link Configuration

Configuring the Network Order Wire


Each Order Wire unit requires a programmable unique site identification number. This
number is programmed using the connected telephone keypad and can be changed at any
time.

To program a site identification number:


1 Lift the handset: The Order Wire displays: - - -
Enter: * * *
The Order Wire displays: EEE 6
2 Enter the three-digit unique site identification number. The Order Wire will display the
three digits entered.
3 Enter: * * * to complete the programming sequence.
4 Re-hook the handset.
The Order Wire will display the programmed site identification number when the
handset is hooked. When the handset is unhooked, the Order Wire will display - - -
until the desired destination site number is entered.
Valid site identification numbers are 101 through 998, excluding numbers ending in
'00' (100, 200, etc.). Numbers ending in '00' are used for block calls to a group of Order
Wire units (i.e.Dialing 100 will ring Order Wire units with site identification 101
through 199). Dialing 999 rings all Order Wire units configured on the network.

To ring an individual site location:


1 To initiate a call, un-hook the telephone and enter the appropriate three-digit site
identification number. The destination Order Wire will ring up to a maximum of five
times and the display will concurrently flash.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 6–11


Installing and Configuring Other Options/Accessories

2 To receive an incoming call simply pick up/un-hook the handset.

To ring multiple site locations:


• To initiate a block call, un-hook the telephone and enter the appropriate block call
number as outlined below:
Dial . . . To Call Sites . . .
100 101-199
200 201-299
300 301-399
400 401-499
500 501-599
600 601-699
700 701-799
800 801-899
900 901-998
999 All Sites

Two volume controls are provided on the front panel of the Order Wire. When the handset
is hooked, the ‘up’ and ‘down’ volume controls raise and lower the ringer volume. When
the handset is unhooked, the ‘up’ and ‘down’ volume controls raise and lower the call
volume.

Engineering Order Wire (EOW) Handset


The Engineering Order Wire (EOW) handset provides voice connection between ends of a
radio link using the AUX #1 RS232 digital overhead channel. Figure 6-11 shows the
EOW configuration. For additional information, see Engineering Order Wire (EOW)
Handset on page 8-31.

Engineering
Orderwire
Handset

Aux #1
Port

Figure 6-11. EOW Configuration

6–12 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


External Alarm Relays

To install the EOW:


1 Plug the EOW into the AUX #1 port of the radio. In a protected configuration, the EOW
handset is plugged into the online IDU.
2 To establish communication with another radio in a link, plug an EOW handset into the
AUX #1 port of the other online radio.

External Alarm Relays


The XP4 Plus radio system includes one external alarm input and five external alarm relay
outputs through a DB15 connector on the IDU front panel. The XP4 Plus discrete alarm
conditions are mapped using LinkView to one or more of the five external alarm relay
outputs. The relays are intended for use with a customer's existing external alarm
collection and monitoring system (i.e., SCADA or similar) when connection to a network
management system is not available. Many of the customer's external monitoring systems
can be configured to dial out to a pager or a central control point.

Configuring External Alarms


The five XP4 Plus "Form C" alarm relay outputs are configured in the factory as
“normally open,” with an option (specified at time of order) to be configured as “normally
closed.”

• A normally open relay output provides a TTL signal (+5 Volts) to the monitoring sys-
tem when the XP4 Plus radio system is operating without alarms. If an alarm occurs,
the contact closes and connects to the ground, providing a grounded signal to the mon-
itoring system. A pull-up resistor is typically required between the radio and the moni-

6
toring equipment.
• A normally closed relay output provides a grounded signal to the monitoring system
when the XP4 Plus radio system is operating without alarms. If an alarm occurs, the
contact opens, disconnecting the ground, and the monitoring system generates an
alarm back to the control point.
The external alarm input is used for monitoring status of equipment or environmental
conditions external to the XP4 Plus radio. The alarm relay input activates on a closed
circuit, generating an alarm when the input connects to ground. Examples of applications
include:

• Commercial power loss


• Air conditioning failure
• Smoke or gas detectors activated
• Door open or closed
• Any other equipment or device whose operation opens or closes a circuit

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 6–13


Installing and Configuring Other Options/Accessories

The five alarm relay outputs can be configured and armed/disarmed through LinkView.
The Alarm Relay screen in LinkView is used to map discrete radio alarms to any of the
five external alarm relays. The single alarm relay input, designated as 'AUX Local' for the
local terminal or 'AUX Remote' for the remote terminal, can also be mapped to any one of
the five external relays. It is recommended that one alarm relay output be reserved for the
external alarm input, if connected. For detailed configuration instructions, please refer to
the LinkView Manual for XP4.

2
Stratex Networks recommends the use of #24 (.205 mm ), 8-pair, tin-plated, PVC-
insulated, twisted-pair copper cable. If working with a protected system, a Y cable is also
required.

Table 6-4 includes a description of the alarm relay DB15 PINs.


Table 6-4. IDU Alarm Relays DB 15 PINs
IDU Alarm Relays Signal Name Signal Description
DB15 PINs
1 Relay #1 NO Relay #1 normally open output
2 Relay #1 NC Relay #1 normally closed output
PIN 8 PIN 1
3 Relay #2 NO Relay #2 normally open output
4 Relay #2 NC Relay #2 normally closed output

PIN 15 PIN 9 5 Relay #3 NO Relay #3 normally open output


6 Relay #3 NC Relay #3 normally closed output
7 Relay #4 NO Relay #4 normally open output
8 Relay #4 NC Relay #4 normally closed output
9 Relay #5 NO Relay #5 normally open output

6–14 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


External Alarm Relays

Table 6-4. IDU Alarm Relays DB 15 PINs (Continued)


IDU Alarm Relays Signal Name Signal Description
DB15 PINs
10 Relay #5 NC Relay #5 normally closed output
11 Common Common connection to all relays
12 GND Station ground output (0V)
13 N/C Not connected
14 GND Station ground output (0V)
15 Ext I/P External alarm input sense
(alarm condition = station ground)

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 6–15


Installing and Configuring Other Options/Accessories

6–16 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


1

Troubleshooting and Maintaining


the XP4 Plus System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
There are several ways to diagnose a problem using existing alarm LEDs and diagnostics:

• Use alarm LEDs on the IDU front panel for initial indication.

• Use the RSL/Alarm display on the IDU front panel to scroll through a list of active
alarms.
• Use SNMP event logs or LinkView monitor logs

• Run loopbacks from the Diagnostics menu in LinkView or use the SNMP option to
7
determine if the problem is in the IDU, ODU, or external. For specific instructions on
running LinkView, refer to the LinkView Manual for XP4, part number 840-600400-
001.
• Check all connections and be aware of common problems.

Interpreting Alarm Messages


When one or more of the Alarm LEDs on the IDU’s front panel continuously flashes from
green to red or turns completely red, it’s time to troubleshoot your XP4 Plus system.

• Green = OK

• Flashing between Green and Red = Possible configuration error or minor


alarm
PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–1
Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

• Red = Major alarm

Figure 7-1. Alarm LEDs

Start by carefully noting the combination of alarms that are evident. For example, the
alarm in Figure 7-2 is caused by a mismatch in link ID codes. This problem can be
corrected by using either the IDU front control panel, LinkView, or SNMP to set all radios
in the link to the same ID code.

For more information about troubleshooting alarms, refer to Table 7-1.


U

EM
BL
U
N

D
ID
O

Alarm LEDs
fla
fla

Gr

Gr
Gr

sh
sh

ee

ee
ee

in
n

n
in

g
n

fro
fro

m
m

Gr
Gr

ee
ee

n
n

to
to

Re
Re

d
d

Figure 7-2. Alarm Combination Sample

7–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Troubleshooting Quick Reference

Troubleshooting Quick Reference


Table 7-1 lists the alarm conditions that may be encountered, the LED colors that
correspond with that condition, and the actions that should be taken to remedy the alarm.
Table 7-2 provides a more detailed description and action steps required for some of the
conditions.

Table 7-1. XP4 Plus Troubleshooting Quick Reference


IDU LED Status

Green (G) = OK
Red (R) = Major Alarm
Flashing Green/Red (G/R) = Possible config.
error or minor alarm

Condition ON IDU ODU CBL REM Corrective Action(s)

Corresponding NMI MIB Parameter 0 1 2 3 4 For use with NMI option

No DC power to IDU Off Off Off Off Off Apply power to the IDU. If no
response, check power source to
IDU. Check/replace fuse on IDU
front panel.

Normal operation G G G G G No action necessary

IDU/ODU cable shorted or open R R R R R Check cable connection to IDU/


circuit ODU (both cable and connectors)

Loss of downlink signal from ODU R R R R R Check cable connection to ODU


(E3/DS-3/16E1) (both cable and connectors)

Minor link fade (local and remote): G/ R G G G G/ R • Check local rainfall conditions
• RSL is below RSL alarm • Check link path for
threshold obstructions
• BER early warning threshold • Check antenna alignment
has been exceeded • Check remote transmitter
output power 7
• Check for interference from
another link in vicinity

Minor link fade (local) or loopback G/ R G G G G • For minor link fade (local), see
present corrective actions listed
above.
• If loopback is present, release
loopback.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–3


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Table 7-1. XP4 Plus Troubleshooting Quick Reference (Continued)


IDU LED Status

Green (G) = OK
Red (R) = Major Alarm
Flashing Green/Red (G/R) = Possible config.
error or minor alarm

Condition ON IDU ODU CBL REM Corrective Action(s)

Corresponding NMI MIB Parameter 0 1 2 3 4 For use with NMI option

Major link fade: R G G G G/ R • Check local rainfall conditions


• Received BER exceeds BER • Check link path for
alarm threshold obstructions
or • Check antenna alignment
• RSL is below RSL alarm • Check remote transmitter
threshold output power
• Check for interference from
another link in vicinity

Total link loss: R R G G R • Check local conditions for


• RSL is below RSL threshold excessive rainfall
• Received BER exceeds BER • Check link path for
alarm threshold obstructions
• Received frame synchronization • Check antenna alignment
may be intermittent • Check remote transmitter
output power
• Check for interference from
another link in vicinity
• Set both XP4 terminals to the
same frequency

Tributary input LOS G G/ R G G G • Configure new tributary


(local only) • Check existing tributary
connections

Tributary input LOS G G/ R G G G/ R • Configure new tributary


(local and remote) • Check existing tributary
connections

Link ID code mismatch G G/ R G G G/ R Set the same link ID codes for


both XP4 terminals

Local XP4 transmitter muted G G G/ R G R Unmute transmitter

ODU output failure G G R G R Replace ODU

IDU transmit failure G R G G R Replace IDU

7–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Troubleshooting Quick Reference

Table 7-1. XP4 Plus Troubleshooting Quick Reference (Continued)


IDU LED Status

Green (G) = OK
Red (R) = Major Alarm
Flashing Green/Red (G/R) = Possible config.
error or minor alarm

Condition ON IDU ODU CBL REM Corrective Action(s)

Corresponding NMI MIB Parameter 0 1 2 3 4 For use with NMI option

• Capacity mismatch R R G/ R G R • Set both XP4 terminals to the


• Frequency mismatch or same capacity.
different RFPs • Set local and remote transmit
frequencies to correspond with
T-R spacing
• Check that RFPs are the same
for both local and remote
terminals.

Transmitter muted on offline unit G G G/ R G G Normal condition for HSB


operation

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–5


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Discrete Alarm Descriptions


Discrete alarms are alarms that occur alone instead of in combination with other alarms.
Table 7-2 lists each type of discrete alarm and provides descriptions and suggested
corrective actions. If the alarm function is reported on the front panel display of the IDU
(when RSL/ALM is selected) the alarm code is shown in parentheses.

For more information on running loopbacks, see Using Loopbacks on page 7-10.

Table 7-2. Discrete Alarms


Discrete Alarm Type Description Action
(RSL/ALM Indicator)

BER Alarm (AL bErH) The received BER has exceeded the • Check other alarms
preset Alarm threshold. • Run loopbacks using LinkView and record
Note: This alarm occurs most any resulting alarms.
commonly because of a link
fade, as often happens during
excessive rainfall.

BER Early Warning The received BER has exceeded the • If alarm occurs on its own, link
(AL bErL) preset Early Warning threshold (refer interference or a faulty IDU (local or
to Table 7-3, LED Alarm Mapping for remote) may be responsible.
XP4 Plus Systems, on page 7–9). • If alarm occurs in conjunction with others,
Note: This alarm occurs most the action required to resolve the fault
commonly because of a link depends on the alarms that appear.
fade, as often happens during
excessive rainfall. • Run loopbacks using LinkView and record
any resulting alarms.

Cable Fault (AL Cbl) Communications between the IDU Determine if the cable is open or shorted by
and ODU have failed. using a multi-meter to measure DC cable
resistance (see instructions immediately
following this table.)

Capacity Mismatch There is a capacity mismatch Verify that both local and remote IDUs are set
(2x/4x and 4x/8x only) between the local and remote IDUs. to the same channel capacity.

IDU Transmit Failure The AMI output signal and/or the Replace the IDU.
clock reference has failed.

Link ID Code (AL id) The signal being received has an If alarm occurs, there is no traffic throughput
unexpected Link ID Code. on the link. Either the remote XP4 Plus
terminal’s Link ID Code is incorrect, or the RF
propagation path to the remote XP4 Plus has
disappeared (due to, e.g. rain fade), and
another XP4 Plus terminal in the vicinity has
been detected (check for interference).

Local External Input An external alarm has been detected The alarm input is located on pin 15 of the
(AL Lau) at the local XP4 Plus IDU. local IDU DB15 ALARM RELAYS connector.
An alarm condition is caused by applying 0
Vdc to the pin.

7–6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Discrete Alarm Descriptions

Table 7-2. Discrete Alarms (Continued)


Discrete Alarm Type Description Action
(RSL/ALM Indicator)

Receive Level (AL rSL) The receive RF level is below the • If this alarm occurs on its own, verify the
preset threshold. RSL, RF path between XP4 Plus terminals,
Note: This alarm occurs most antenna alignment, and remote terminal
commonly because of a link transmitter power output setting.
fade, as often happens during • If this alarm occurs in conjunction with
excessive rainfall.
others, the action required depends on the
activated alarm. Use the loopbacks in
LinkView to locate the problem (see page
7–10).

Receive PLL The receiver phase-locked-loop has • If this alarm occurs on its own, replace the
(AL rLoC) lost lock. ODU.
• If this alarm occurs in conjunction with the
Transmit PLL, replace the IDU (reference
source failure).

Remote External Input One or more external alarms have The alarm input is located on pin 15 of the
(AL rAu) been detected at the remote XP4 Plus remote IDU DB15 ALARM RELAYS connector.
IDU. An alarm condition is caused by applying 0
Vdc to the pin.

Transmit Power (AL tP) There is low power output from final Replace the ODU.
stage of microwave power amplifier.

Transmit PLL Indicates the transmitter phase- • If this alarm occurs on its own, replace the
(AL TLoC) locked-loop has lost lock. ODU.
• If this alarm occurs in conjunction with the
Receive PLL, replace the IDU (reference
source failure).

Trib 1-8 Fault (AL tr1, AL tr2, A LOS (loss-of-signal) condition has • Check continuity of data connections to the
AL tr3, AL tr4 AL tr5, AL tr6, been detected on the tributary input. IDU.
AL tr7, AL tr8) Note: For 2x/4x/8x and 16E1 • If the tributary is receiving data and is set

Trib 9-16 Fault (AL Tr10, AL


systems, this alarm occurs
when data is applied to a
to inverted, set it to normal. 7
previously unused tributary • If the tributary is not receiving data and is
tr11, AL tr12, AL tr13, AL set to normal, set it to inverted.
whose tributary alarm
tr14, AL tr15, AL tr16) configuration has been
inverted. To remove alarm, set
tributary configuration to
“normal” (see page 4–16 for
instructions).

Additional Alarm for E3, DS-3, and 16E1 Systems

Downlink Loss (AL dnl) A loss of signal on the downlink cable • Check cable connections
has occurred. • Check other alarms
• Run IDU and ODU digital loopback
• Check for loss of data from other end of
link

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–7


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Table 7-2. Discrete Alarms (Continued)


Discrete Alarm Type Description Action
(RSL/ALM Indicator)

AIS to CUST (AIS) Alarm is generated by the MSU/SU. • Check cable connection between the IDU
Indicates that AIS has been detected and MSU/SU
on the E3 input to the MSU/SU from • Check IDU alarms
the IDU.

E3 Los A (AL A) Alarm is generated by the MSU. • Check cable connection between the IDU A
A loss of E3 input to the MSU from and MSU/SU
IDU A has occurred. • Check IDU alarms

E3 Los B (AL B) Alarm is generated by the MSU. • Check cable connection between the IDU B
Indicates that a loss of E3 input to the and MSU/SU
MSU from IDU B has occurred. • Check IDU alarms

E3 Frame (AL Fr) Alarm is generated by the MSU/SU. Check the cable connection between the IDU
Indicates a loss of frame and MSU/SU.
synchronization on the E3 input to the
MSU/SU from the IDU.

Determining if Cable Is Open or Shorted


When a Cable Fault (AL Cbl) alarm occurs, the DC cable must be tested to determine
whether it is open or shorted. Complete the following steps to make this determination.

1 Disconnect power to the XP4 Plus IDU.


2 Remove the N-type ODU connector from the IDU.
3 Measure the DC resistance between the center pin and the outer of the N-type connector
terminating the cable.
4 Find the resistance measurement in the following table and follow the actions listed.

Reading Indication Action

If resistance is between Indicates a good cable connection. Proceed to test the IDU and/or ODU.
1MΩ Ω and 10MΩΩ. . . • Replace IDU.
• If alarm persists, swap replacement IDU
for original and replace ODU.

7–8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Troubleshooting Using the Front Panel

Reading Indication Action

If resistance is less than Indicates a poor cable connection. • Check the whole length and both ends of
1MΩ . . . the cable thoroughly for damage or any
conditions that would cause low cable
resistance.
• If nothing is found, re-terminate both ends
of the cable with new N-type connectors.
• Re-measure cable resistance (with cable
disconnected at both ends). Resistance
should be unmeasurable or open circuit.
• If cable resistance is unchanged, replace
entire cable run and terminate with new N-
type connectors.

If resistance is unmeasurable Indicates cable is an open circuit. • Check the whole length and both ends of
... the cable thoroughly for damage or any
conditions that would cause an open circuit
(e.g. connector not terminated correctly
and/or badly corroded or cut cable).
• If nothing is found, re-terminate both ends
of the cable with new N-type connectors.
• Re-measure cable resistance (with cable
disconnected at both ends). Resistance
should be unmeasurable or open circuit.
• If cable resistance is unchanged, replace
cable and terminate with new N-type
connectors.
• If cable is cut, replace entire cable run,
terminating with new N-type connectors.

Troubleshooting Using the Front Panel


The XP4 Plus alarms on the front panel are not mapped through LinkView. Common
alarm situations and the resulting LED status are detailed in Table 7-1. Referring to these
7
tables is often the quickest way to troubleshoot system alarms. For more information on
troubleshooting alarms, see Discrete Alarm Descriptions on page 7-6.

Table 7-3. LED Alarms for XP4 Plus Systems


LED LED Description Green = OK
Red = Major Alarm
Flashing from Green to Red = Possible configuration error or minor alarm

Green Flashing Green to Red Red

ON Online Normal BER early warning BER alarm


RSL alarm
Loopback

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–9


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Table 7-3. LED Alarms for XP4 Plus Systems (Continued)


LED LED Description Green = OK
Red = Major Alarm
Flashing from Green to Red = Possible configuration error or minor alarm

Green Flashing Green to Red Red

IDU IDU Summary Normal Trib alarm Frame loss


ID code mismatch IDU Tx Failure

ODU ODU Summary Normal TX muted TX power


Capacity mismatch TX PLL
Frequency channel mismatch RX PLL

CBL Cable Normal ODU-IDU comms failed


Downlink Loss (E3/DS-3/16E1)

REM Remote Normal Summary of the following Summary of the following alarms
alarms detected at remote detected at remote terminal:
terminal: • BER alarm
• BER early warning • Frame loss
• RSL alarm • IDU Tx Failure
• Trib alarm • TX power
• ID code mismatch • TX PLL
• Capacity mismatch • RX PLL
• Downlink Loss
Also, a local terminal frame loss alarm
condition will cause this LED to light,
indicating remote to local XP4 Plus
communications have failed.

Using Loopbacks
For additional troubleshooting, customers who have purchased LinkView proprietary
management software from Stratex Networks can configure loopback paths. For more
information on LinkView, refer to Using LinkView on page 4-2 or the LinkView Manual
for XP4.
Loopbacks can be used to check the working condition of the following radio system
components:

• ODU

• IDU

• SU or MSU

• Tributary connections
See the following sections for descriptions of available loopbacks, including explanations
of the diagnostic information they provide and activation instructions.

7–10 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using Loopbacks

Warning: Before running loopbacks on protected systems, see the section


Running Tributary Loopbacks on Protected Systems on page 7-26.

Activating Loopbacks
To activate loopbacks:
1 Log in to LinkView.
2 From the Tools menu, select Diagnostic Tools. The Diagnostic Tools dialog box
opens.

3 Choose the loopback you want from the Loopbacks selection box.

4 Click Apply. The following message appears:


“Writing data to the radio may affect traffic. Do you want to continue?”
5 Click Yes to run the loopback.
Click No to close the message and close the Diagnostic Tools dialog box.
Click Cancel to close the message and return to the Diagnostic Tools dialog box.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–11


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

ODU Loopbacks
The following ODU loopbacks are available:

• Local ODU Analog (available for all XP4 Plus systems)


See the Local ODU Analog Loopback section on page 7–12 for an explanation of the
troubleshooting information provided by this loopback.
• Local ODU Digital (available for all XP4 Plus systems)
See the Local ODU Digital Loopback section on page 7–14 for an explanation of the
troubleshooting information provided by this loopback.
• Local ODU RF (see note)
See the Local ODU RF Loopback (option for 23, 38 GHz radios) section on
page 7–16 for an explanation of the troubleshooting information provided by this loop-
back.
Note: Local ODU RF is available as an option for 23 and 38 GHz XP4 Plus
radios. This option is standard, however, for XP4 Classic radios.
You must have Administration level user access authority to activate loopbacks.

Local ODU Analog Loopback


This loopback is used to determine if the fault lies in the ODU. It checks the signal
processor and related analog circuits and the microprocessor and related digital circuits in
the local ODU.

It does this by routing the composite data stream at the output of the 2-4 level converter
directly to the demodulator output, bypassing the transmit and receive RF modules. The
ODU analog loopback includes the entire baseband path.
Figure 7-3 shows the main signal path in analog ODU loopback mode. Figure 7-4 shows
the ODU analog loopback. (Note that an E3/DS-3 radio uses a triplexer instead of a
quadplexer.)

Local Terminal
Analog
Switch

Digital

Digital
Trib

RF

PS IDU ODU

Figure 7-3. ODU Analog Loopback Signal Path

7–12 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


VVA CONTROL
TX IF DAUGHTER CARD TRANSCEIVER MODULE

TX IF REF ACTIVE
(FROM PLL 4 dB 10 dB VVA VVA 6 dB
SYNTHESIZER LOOP vco
PROCESSOR PAD PAD #1 #2 PAD
FILTER
CARD)
MOD

Figure 7-4.
PORTION OF PROCESSOR CARD

4-LEVEL
AMI RECEIVER DEMUX FILTER
CODER
XN
VCO TUNING VOLTAGE
(FROM RX IF MAIN BOARD) TO/FROM
ANTENNA
ANALOG LOOP VOLTAGE
TO/ POWER

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002


CONTROLLED X N1 DIPLEXER
TAMI DIVIDER
FROM OSCILLATOR
IDU
N-PLEXER TO DC/DC CONVERTER DC/DC CONVERTER,
VCO PRESCALER OUTPUT XN
SEQUENCING :M
(TO RX IF MAIN BOARD)
140 MHz (LOW DATA RATE) CIRCUIT,
233 MHz (HIGH DATA RATE)
VOLTAGE
140/233 REGULATORS RX IF LO
MHz LO
RAMI

ODU Analog Loopback


MUX
DEMOD
/RSSI

ADAPTIVE
SLICER

NIQUIST DEMOD 15 DB DEMOD


FILTER /RSSI PAD /RSSI

PORTION OF RSSI
PROCESSOR OP AMP RX RSL
CARD
SAW FILTER
DAUGHTER
CARD

FILTER SELECT
Using Loopbacks

7–13
7
Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Local ODU Digital Loopback


This loopback checks the microprocessor and related digital circuitry (including the IDU-
ODU cable and interface) in the ODU. If the ODU analog loopback described above
doesn’t run, this ODU digital loopback can be used to learn whether the microprocessor
and digital circuitry is the cause of the problem.

The ODU digital loopback routes the composite digital data stream prior to the digital-to-
analog converter directly to the multiplexer input, bypassing the RF and analog modules.
The local ODU digital loopback includes the tributaries, transmit and receive
multiplexers, scrambler, and FEC circuitry.
Figure 7-5 shows the main signal path in Local ODU Digital loopback mode. Figure 7-6
shows the ODU digital loopback. (Note that an E3/DS-3 radio uses a triplexer instead of a
quadplexer.)

Local Terminal

Analog
Switch

Digital

Digital
Trib

RF

PS IDU ODU

Figure 7-5. ODU Digital Loopback Signal Path

7–14 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


VVA CONTROL
TX IF DAUGHTER CARD TRANSCEIVER MODULE

TX IF REF
PLL ACTIVE
(FROM 4 dB 10 dB VVA VVA 6 dB
SYNTHESIZER LOOP vco
PROCESSOR PAD PAD #1 #2 PAD
FILTER
CARD)
MOD

Figure 7-6.
PORTION OF PROCESSOR CARD

4-LEVEL
AMI RECEIVER DEMUX FILTER
CODER
XN
VCO TUNING VOLTAGE
(FROM RX IF MAIN BOARD) TO/FROM
ANTENNA
VOLTAGE
TO/ POWER
CONTROLLED X N1 DIPLEXER

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002


TAMI
DIGITAL LOOP DIVIDER
FROM OSCILLATOR
IDU
N-PLEXER TO DC/DC CONVERTER DC/DC CONVERTER,
VCO PRESCALER OUTPUT XN
SEQUENCING :M
(TO RX IF MAIN BOARD)
140 MHz (LOW DATA RATE) CIRCUIT,
233 MHz (HIGH DATA RATE)
VOLTAGE
140/233 REGULATORS RX IF LO
MHz LO
RAMI

ODU Digital Loopback


MUX
DEMOD
/RSSI

ADAPTIVE
SLICER

NIQUIST DEMOD 15 DB DEMOD


FILTER /RSSI PAD /RSSI

PORTION OF RSSI
PROCESSOR OP AMP RX RSL
CARD
SAW FILTER
DAUGHTER
CARD

FILTER SELECT
Using Loopbacks

7–15
7
Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Local ODU RF Loopback (option for 23, 38 GHz radios)


Use the RF loopback for an unambiguous check of all active circuitry in an XP4 Plus
terminal. The transmitter is tuned to the highest frequency possible. RF leakage through
the ODU diplexer assembly allows the receiver to synchronize with the transmitter. The
transmitter of the remote ODU is muted to prevent interference.

This loopback is available as a standard feature for high frequency XP4 Plus radios and as
an option for high frequency XP4 Plus radios. It is not available, even as an option, in any
XP4 or XP4 Plus radio with a frequency range below 23 GHz.

To determine whether the RF Loopback option is available in your


radio:
1 From the Tools menu, select Diagnostic Tools. The Diagnostic Tools dialog box
opens.
2 Click on the Select a Loopback pulldown menu in the Loopbacks group box to
search for the ODU RF loopback.
The transmit frequency of the local ODU is changed to transmit to its own receiver at
maximum power. The transmitter of the remote ODU is muted to prevent interference.

Figure 7-7 shows the main signal path in RF loopback mode. Figure 7-8 shows the RF
loopback. (Note that an E3/DS-3 radio uses a triplexer instead of a quadplexer.)

Local Terminal
Analog
Switch

Digital

Digital
Trib

RF

PS IDU ODU

Figure 7-7. ODU RF Loopback Signal Path

7–16 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using Loopbacks

Figure 7-8. RF Loopback

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–17


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

IDU Loopbacks
The following IDU loopbacks are available:

• Local IDU Digital (available for 2x/4x/8x systems)


See the Local IDU Digital Loopback section on page 7–18 for an explanation of the
troubleshooting information provided by this loopback.
• Local IDU E3/DS-3
See the Local IDU E3/DS-3 Loopback section on page 7–19 for an explanation of the
troubleshooting information provided by this loopback.
You must have Maintenance or Administration level user access authority to activate
loopbacks.

Local IDU Digital Loopback


Use this loopback to check all circuitry contained in the IDU.

This loopback routes the outgoing data stream to the incoming stream, bypassing the AMI
conversion. All tributary inputs are multiplexed and de-multiplexed and then returned to
the tributary outputs. The incoming data stream from the remote terminal will be affected.
Figure 7-9 shows the main signal path in IDU loopback mode. Figure 7-10 shows the IDU
digital loopback. (Note that an E3/DS-3 radio uses a triplexer instead of a quadplexer.)

Local Terminal
Analog
Switch

Digital

Digital
Trib

RF

PS IDU ODU

Figure 7-9. IDU Loopback Signal Path

7–18 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using Loopbacks

Figure 7-10. IDU Digital Loopback

Local IDU E3/DS-3 Loopback


This loopback, available only in E3 or DS-3 radios, performs exactly the same function as
the Local IDU Digital Loopback described above.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–19


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Activating Tributary Loopbacks


Tributary loopbacks are available for 2x/4x, 4x/8x, E3, and DS-3 systems.
Note: For DS-3/E3 systems, the SU Remote loopback tests whether the SU,
as the sole tributary linking customer equipment to the XP4 Plus
radio system, is receiving customer data. See Activating SU Remote
Loopbacks on page 7–26 for details.
For 16xE1 systems, the Remote MSU E1 loopback is used to check
individual tributary connections. See the Activating MSU Loopbacks
section on page 7–28 for details.
The following tributary loopbacks are available:

• Local Tributary Loopback


See the Local Tributary Loopback section on page 7–22 for an explanation of the trou-
bleshooting information provided by this loopback.
• Remote Tributary Loopback
See the Remote Tributary Loopback section on page 7–24 for an explanation of the
troubleshooting information provided by this loopback.
You must have Maintenance or Administration level user access authority to activate
loopbacks.

To activate tributary loopbacks:


1 Log in to LinkView.
2 From the Tools menu, select Diagnostic Tools. The Diagnostic Tools dialog box
opens.
.

7–20 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using Loopbacks

3 Choose Tributary Loopback from the Loopbacks selection box.

The tributary loopback window will show up to eight tributaries, depending on how
your system is configured. Examples of the 2x, 4x, and 8x configurations are shown
below.

For each configuration, you can activate loopbacks on all tributaries, a single tributary, 7
or any combination of tributaries. To activate the desired loopback(s), select a tributary
or combination of tributaries and choose between local and remote.
Note: You cannot run a combination of remote and local tributary
loopbacks all at one time.
4 After selecting the tributary loopbacks that you want to activate, click Apply. The
following message appears:
“Writing data to the radio may affect traffic. Do you want to continue?”
The incoming data stream for the tributary channel(s) in loopback will be affected.
5 Click Yes to run the loopback(s).
Click No to close the message and close the Diagnostic Tools dialog box. Click
Cancel to close the message and return to the Diagnostic Tools dialog box.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–21


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Local Tributary Loopback


This loopback is used with all systems to locate faults in equipment and cable connections
to the local IDU. It does this by routing each tributary input (data from customer) directly
back to the corresponding tributary input.

Figure 7-11 shows the main signal path in Local Tributary loopback mode. Figure 7-12
shows the local tributary loopback. (Note that an E3/DS-3 radio uses a triplexer instead of
a quadplexer.)

Local Terminal

Analog
Switch

Digital

Digital
Trib

RF
PS IDU ODU

Figure 7-11. Local Tributary Loopback Signal Path

7–22 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using Loopbacks

Figure 7-12. Local Tributary Loopback

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–23


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Remote Tributary Loopback


This loopback is used with all systems to locate faults in equipment and cable connections
in the remote terminal. It connects the transmit data stream directly to the receive data
stream to check the functionality of the local and remote sides in both directions.

Figure 7-13 shows the main signal path in Remote Tributary loopback mode. Figure 7-14
shows the remote tributary loopback. (Note that an E3/DS-3 radio uses a triplexer instead
of a quadplexer.)

Local Terminal Remote Terminal

Analog

Switch
Digital

Digital
Analog
Switch

Digital

Digital

Trib
RF
Trib

RF

PS IDU ODU ODU IDU PS


Local IDU Trib

Remote IDU Trib

Figure 7-13. Remote Tributary Loopback Signal Path

7–24 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using Loopbacks

Figure 7-14. Remote Tributary Loopback

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–25


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Running Tributary Loopbacks on Protected Systems


Always run loopbacks on the online radio. Be aware that loopbacks interrupt traffic on the
tributaries being tested.
Note: Before running a local or remote loopback test on a protected
16xE1,E3, or DS-3 system, lock the transmitter and receiver
functions to the side on which you want to run the test (either to Side
A or to Side B). This can only be done at the protection switch. The
following section includes instructions for force switching your
protected system.

Force Switching a Protected System


LEDs on the front panel of the IDUs in protected systems clearly indicate which XP4 Plus
terminal is online and whether the MSU is in auto or manual switch mode. See below for
instructions on how to interpret these LEDs.

Tx/Rx A, B, or Auto:

• Green = Online and no alarms

• Flashing Green = Offline and no alarms

• Red = Offline and alarmed

• Flashing Red = Loss of communications signal from IDU

• Orange = Forced online and alarmed


If the LEDs show that Side A is online and you want to run loopbacks on Side B, set the
three-position rocker switch on the front panel to “B.”

After running loopbacks, be sure to return all switches to their normal operating positions.

Activating SU Remote Loopbacks


The SU remote loopback is only used for protected E3 and DS-3 systems. It is not
available for any other XP4 Plus system. See below for an explanation of the diagnostic
information that this loopback provides as well as activation instructions.

Diagnostic Information Provided


The SU Remote loopback locates faults in equipment and tributary cable connections
by looping a DS-3 or E3 tributary input (data from customer) from the remote side to the
local side of the link, thus checking the functionality of the local and remote sides in both
directions.

7–26 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using Loopbacks

The following diagram shows the main signal path in remote SU E3/DS-3 loopback mode:

Local Terminal Remote Terminal

Switch
Analog
Digital

Digital
Analog
Switch

Digital

Digital

Trib
RF
Trib

RF
PS IDU ODU ODU IDU PS

Remote Switch Trib


(E3/DS-3 Only)

Figure 7-15. Remote SU E3/DS-3 Loopback Signal Path

The SU loopback is only available for the remote switch unit. There is no SU loopback for
the local switch unit. Customer data coming through the local switch gets checked by the
local IDU ES3 / DS-3 loopback.

To activate the remote SU loopback:


1 Log in to LinkView.
2 From the Tools menu, select Diagnostic Tools. The Diagnostic Tools dialog box
opens.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–27


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

3 In the Loopbacks selection box, click on Remote SU E3/DS-3.

4 Click Apply. The following message displays:


“Writing data to the radio may affect traffic. Do you want to continue?”
The incoming data stream for the tributary channel(s) in loopback will be affected.
5 Click Yes to run the loopback(s).
Click No to close the message and close the Diagnostic Tools dialog box. Click
Cancel to close the message and return to the Diagnostic Tools dialog box.

Activating MSU Loopbacks


The following MSU loopbacks are available:

• Remote MSU E1 (16xE1 systems)


See the Remote MSU E1 Loopback section on page 7–28 for an explanation of the
troubleshooting information provided by this loopback.
• Local MSU E3 (protected E3 systems)
See the section Local MSU E3 Loopback on page 7–30 for an explanation of the trou-
bleshooting information provided by this loopback.

Remote MSU E1 Loopback


This loopback locates faults in equipment and tributary cable connections for 16xE1
systems by feeding the output of the multiplexer into the demultiplexer in the MSU.

The following diagram shows the main signal path in Remote MSU E1 loopback mode:

7–28 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Using Loopbacks

Local Terminal Remote Terminal

Switch
Analog
Digital

Digital
Analog
Switch

Digital

Digital

Trib
RF
Trib

RF
PS IDU ODU ODU IDU PS

Remote Switch Trib


(16xE1 Only)

Figure 7-16. Remote MSU E1 Loopback Signal Path

To activate the remote MSU E1 loopback:


1 Log in to LinkView.
2 From the Tools menu, select Diagnostic Tools. The Diagnostic Tools dialog box
opens.
3 In the Loopbacks selection box, select Remote MSU E1.

4 In the Tributary # box, enter the number of the tributary for which you want to run
the loopback.
Note: You can only run a remote MSU E1 loopback on one tributary at a
time. After you run a loopback on a trib, you must turn that loopback
off before running additional loopbacks, or you will receive an error
message.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–29


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

5 Click Apply. The following message appears:


“Writing data to the radio may affect traffic. Do you want to continue?”
The incoming data stream for the tributary channel(s) in loopback will be affected.
6 Click Yes to run the loopback(s).
Click No to close the message and close the Diagnostic Tools dialog box. Click
Cancel to close the message and return to the Diagnostic Tools dialog box.

Local MSU E3 Loopback


This loopback is used to make sure your MSU is getting a signal from customer
equipment. To do this, it feeds the output of the multiplexer into the demultiplexer in the
MSU, thus looping all tributaries between 1 and 16 at the local side.

Figure 7-17 shows the main signal path in remote Local MSU E3 loopback mode.

Local Terminal Remote Terminal

Switch
Analog
Digital

Digital
Analog
Switch

Digital

Digital

Trib
RF
Trib

RF

PS IDU ODU ODU IDU PS

Local Switch (MSU E3)

Figure 7-17. Local MSU E3 Loopback Signal Path

To activate the Local MSU E3 loopback:


1 Log in to LinkView.
2 From the Tools menu, select Diagnostic Tools. The Diagnostic Tools dialog box
opens.
3 In the Loopbacks selection box, select Local MSU E3.

7–30 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Common Problems

4 Click Apply. The following message appears:


“Writing data to the radio may affect traffic. Do you want to continue?”
The incoming data stream for the tributary channel(s) in loopback will be affected.
5 Click Yes to run the loopback(s).
Click No to close the message and close the Diagnostic Tools dialog box. Click
Cancel to close the message and return to the Diagnostic Tools dialog box.

Common Problems
Table 7-4 below lists some types of commonly encountered problems, what they mean,
and suggested actions to help solve the problems.

Table 7-4. Common Problems

Problem Type Description Action

“LoUncal” displays on IDU • Typically combined with loss of • Check antenna alignment.
front panel signal/frame alarms • Check that Local and Remote Tx
• Receive level is below the frequencies correspond to correct T-R
calibrated range of the radio spacing.
(-80dBm) • Check that remote transmitter is powered
on (I.e, not muted).
• Run loopbacks, if required.
• Check for path obstructions.
• Check remote transmit power.
• Check for excessive rainfall or other path
fade conditions.

“HiUncal” displays on IDU Receive level is above the calibrated • Reduce remote transmit power to check
front panel range of the radio (-30 or -40dBm) RSL.
• Do not run radio with RSL above –25 dBm.
• If combined with bit errors, RSL may be
above –20dBm.

Low receive signal level Receive level is below the expected • Verify antenna alignment.
7
RSL level shown on the radio • If 20dB below expected, check that
configuration sheet antenna is not aligned on a side-lobe.
• If 30dB below expected, check that ODU or
antenna is not cross-polarized.
• Check transmit power on remote.
• Check for path obstructions.
• Check for heavy rainfall in area or other
path fade condition.
• If available, run RF loopback to verify
receive level of individual terminal.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–31


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Table 7-4. Common Problems (Continued)

Problem Type Description Action

BER, Frame alarms with Indicates loss of frame but not loss of • Check for interference from another RF
‘HiUncal’ or normal RSL receive signal source.
• In a protected system, both remote
transmitters may be transmitting on the
same frequency. Check remote protection
switch mode, transmit power status, and
interconnecting cables.

“Err1” displays on IDU front Frequency plan in the IDU does not • Obtain correct frequency plan from Stratex
panel match the ODU parameters for Band, Networks (contact the Help Desk).
Capacity, or T-R spacing • Download frequency plan (RFP file) using
LinkView.
• Frequency plan can also be entered
manually using LinkView.

Required channel frequency Radio Frequency Plan and/or ODU • Verify ODU minimum and maximum limits
not available sub-band may not support the (diplexer) and T-R spacing correspond to
required frequency required frequencies (contact the Stratex
Networks Help Desk for assistance).
• If ODUs are correct, the Radio Frequency
Plan (RFP) needs to be changed. Obtain
correct frequency plan from Stratex
Networks (contact the Help Desk).
• RFP files can be uploaded to the IDU using
LinkView.

IDU LED is flashing red/ Tributary setting does not correspond • If incoming data is present, tributary
green with presence of incoming data should be set to ‘n’ or ‘normal’.
• If incoming data is NOT present, tributary
should be set to ‘I’ or ‘inverted’ (2x/4x ,
4x/8x, and 16x only).
• Ensure that the Link ID code is the same.

ODU LED is flashing red/ Normal operation for system in Hot • No action required.
green on offline unit (in a Standby protection mode
protected system)

Cannot access NMI through NMI may not be present or the cable • Check to see if NMI card is inserted in rear
VT100, Ethernet or LinkView connection needs to be verified of IDU.
• If NMI card is present, verify that the LED
on the card is green.
• Verify that the NMI card is front access,
I.e., no RJ-45 connectors on NMI card
itself.
• Verify that the cables between the
computer and NMI are correctly wired, not
faulty.
• Try a hard reset (button on rear of card).

Cannot access LinkView • Try switching between null vs. straight


cable.

7–32 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Technical Support

Table 7-4. Common Problems (Continued)

Problem Type Description Action

Solid or Intermittent Cable Missing connection on IDU-ODU cable • Verify that cable is connected to both IDU
Alarm (all red LEDs) and ODU.
• Visually check for loose connector/cable
connections on IDU-ODU cable.
• Check for open or shorts on IDU-ODU
cable.

“odu?” displays on IDU front Indicates that ODU cannot be seen by • Check cable and connectors for possible
panel IDU IDU-ODU cable fault.
• Failed ODU. Return unit through RMA
process .

Solid red LEDs won’t go away Possible equipment failure • Run loopbacks to determine source of
failure (IDU, ODU, or SU/MSU).
• If possible, switch IDU and/or ODU
connections to see if failure follows one or
the other.
• Record alarms and cycle power down and
back up.
• If all else fails, call the Stratex Networks’
Help Desk.

Technical Support
Stratex Networks provides 24-hour, 365-day-a-year technical support over the telephone
through our Customer Service department. For Help Desk contact information, see page i
of the Preface.

When contacting Customer Service, be prepared to provide the following information if


possible:

• Unit part numbers and serial numbers 7


• Frequency and capacity

• IDU and ODU software versions

• Description of LEDs (red/green/flashing)

• List of active alarms present on RSL display (scroll using arrow keys) on IDU front
panel
• If protected, what are the protection switch settings (mode, control) and LED status

• If ‘Err1’ on front panel or mis-matched frequencies, need Radio Frequency Plan


Reports containing all of the above information (and much more) can be printed from
LinkView.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 7–33


Troubleshooting and Maintaining the XP4 Plus System

Faulty Equipment
If any XP4 Plus equipment is faulty, refer to the purchasing agreement for the equipment
return policy and then contact Customer Service at one of the numbers provided on page i
of the Preface.
Note: The equipment warranty is void if the warranty seals on the IDU or
ODU have been tampered with.

Maintaining the XP4 Plus


The XP4 Plus system is designed to operate with minimum regular maintenance. Stratex
Networks does recommend, however, that a semi-annual inspection is performed to check
the physical installation of the equipment for weatherproofing, deterioration, or damage,
unless local laws or ordinances specify otherwise. Refer to the Stratex Networks’
Standard Practices Guide for maintenance information on specific equipment.
Because the XP4 Plus radio series does not require extensive maintenance, a set of
hardware test points are not provided. All relevant hardware and software points are
monitored by the processors in the ODU/IDU modules. These will initiate an alarm
condition for the module that goes out of specification. Fault finding, system monitoring,
and terminal configuration is carried out through the front panel keypad/display, through a
DB9 connector using a laptop computer, or through SNMP.

Checking Cables and Grounding Connections


Every six months, the cables, self-adhesive tape, and all grounding connections should be
visually checked for corrosion and electrolysis and cleaned if necessary.

Stratex also recommends that a signal generator be used periodically to check for flaws in
the cable. The generator sweeps from 300 Hz to 1 Ghz to see if there are any spikes
(differences in impedance or resistance). A spike could indicate that the cable is damaged
in some way—crimped; a flaw in the center conductor, dielectric foam, or ground shield;
or an open cable. To perform the test, the link must be turned off and the cable from the
ODU and the IDU must be disconnected.

Monitoring Electrostatic Discharge


The XP4 Plus radio is fully enclosed and is designed so that the radio unit can be replaced
without being opened. The only time the unit needs to be opened is when the NMI option
card is replaced. An ESD-approved wrist strap that is properly grounded should always be
worn when handling the NMI option card, before removing it from the unit.

7–34 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


1

XP4 Plus System Description


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
The XP4 Plus series of millimeter and microwave products are built for short-haul, high-
reliability, easy-to-install, low-cost point-to-point communication links. Applications
include PCS/PCN micro-cell fixed-network infrastructure, last-mile connections for local
telephony, cellular back-haul interconnections, and private networks for government,
educational institutions, banks, and commercial organizations.

Features
The features offered by the XP4 Plus are some of the most extensive in the industry,
delivered at a reasonable cost. The major XP4 Plus features include:

• Minimal installation time

• Single coaxial cable connection between Indoor and Outdoor Units

• Dual polarity DC power input (+/-21.6 to 60 VDC) 8


• Adjustable transmit output power

• Frequency/channel setting via keypad, laptop PC, or SNMP

• Diagnostic loopbacks accessible via laptop PC or SNMP

• Capacity to store 25 different channel plans

• 255 different link ID codes

• Selectable data rate (2x/4x and 4x/8x)


PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–1
XP4 Plus System Description

• Alarm summary available via keypad, laptop PC, or SNMP

• Forward Error Correction (FEC)

• Low power consumption

• No conventional radio IF frequencies on the cable

• No cable length settings or adjustments required

• Protection, SNMP, ATPC, Orderwire, and High Power options available

Figure 8-1. XP4 Plus Series Microwave Radio System

Architecture
The XP4 Plus is designed for data rates up to 16 x 2.048 Mbps (16E1), 1 x 34 Mbps (E3),
8 x 1.544 Mbps (8DS-1), or 1 x 45 Mbps (DS-3) in protected and non-protected
configurations in frequency bands from 7 GHz to 38 GHz. Outdoor Units (ODUs) are
software configurable so that capacity upgrades can be made without climbing towers.
Indoor Units (IDUs) support capacities of up to 16E1, E3, 8DS-1, or DS-3 and are
frequency independent so they can be used with any ODU.

A universal radio architecture concept has been implemented for the XP4 Plus product
line. To maximize flexibility, commonality of spare parts and interchangeability, this
architecture structure is used for the full frequency range from 7 to 38 GHz.

8–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Architecture

XP4
MICROWAVE RADIO SYSTEM
FREQUENCY BANDS
AND DATA RATES

7/8 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 24 GHz 26 GHz 27/31 GHz 38 GHz

2x4x E1 2x4x E1 2x4x E1 2x4x E1 2x4x E1 4x8x DS-1 2x4x E1 4x8x DS-1 2x4x E1

4x8x E1 4x8x E1 4x8x E1 4x8x E1 4x8x E1 DS-3 4x8x E1 DS-3 4x8x E1

16x E1 16x E1 16x E1 16x E1 16x E1 16x E1 16x E1

E3 E3 E3 E3 E3 E3 E3

4x8x DS-1 4x8x DS-1 4x8x DS-1 4x8x DS-1


DS-3 DS-3 DS-3 DS-3

Figure 8-2. XP4 Plus Frequency Bands and Data Rates

The following table lists the data rates included in the graphic above and the line codes
associated with each data rate:

Table 8-1. Data Rates and Line Codes

Data Rate Line Code

CEPT
1xE1 2.048 Mbps HDB3
1xE3 34.638 Mbps HDB3
ANSI
1xDS-1 1.544 Mbps B8ZS or AMI
1xDS-3 44.736 Mbps B3ZS

A standard radio terminal consists of four components:

• IDU—The IDU provides the multiplexing, scrambling/descrambling, FEC, status,


alarm and control functions. 8
• ODU—The ODU contains the modem, IF distribution, and RF modules.

• Coaxial cable—A single coaxial cable is required to feed DC power from the IDU to
the ODU. The cable supports bi-directional traffic, alarm signals, and control signals.
• Antenna (purchased separately)—The antenna is application and frequency specific.
Two matched radio terminals are necessary to establish a link that relays signals between
point A and point B.
Figures 8-3 through 8-8 show examples of possible non-protected and protected
configurations.
PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–3
XP4 Plus System Description

Possible Configurations
The following figures show the possible XP4 Plus non-protected and protected
configurations. The type of equipment used within these configurations varies according
to general frequency band, transmit to receive (T-R) spacing, specific frequency sub-band,
and data rate/capacity.

XP4 Plus Non-protected Configurations

Figure 8-3. Non-protected Configuration for 2x/4xE1 and 4x/


8x E1/DS-1 Capacities

8–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Architecture

Figure 8-4. Non-protected Configuration for E3 and DS-3


Capacities

Figure 8-5. Non-protected Configuration for 16xE1 Capacity


PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–5
XP4 Plus System Description

XP4 Plus Protected Configurations

Figure 8-6. Protected Configuration for 2x/4xE1 and 4x/8x


E1/DS-1 Capacities

Figure 8-7. Protected Configuration for E3 and DS-3 Capacities

8–6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XP4 Plus IDU (Indoor unit)

Figure 8-8. Protected Configuration for 16xE1 Capacity

XP4 Plus IDU (Indoor unit)


The IDU is the control center of the system. Its main functions include:

• Data interface

• Error correction

• Scrambling/descrambling

• Alarm/status monitoring

• Site-to-site communications
The system is fully configurable through the IDU front-panel keypad or the LinkView

8
software interface. All major functions of the radio can be configured through the IDU’s
front-panel keypad.

The IDU can store up to 25 different frequency plans, all of which operators can edit as
required using LinkView. LinkView is a software package that serves as a link manager
for the system, giving the user access to enhanced configuration and diagnostic options. A
password is required for configuration changes using LinkView. Using a password for
changes through the front-panel keypad is set as a default, but not required.
For more information on configuration options and using LinkView, see
“Chapter 4, Configuring the XP4 Plus.”

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–7


XP4 Plus System Description

XP4 Plus IDU Features


• 1 Rack Unit (RU) high (1.75"), 19" wide

• 5 alarm relay outputs

• 1 external alarm input sensor

• Front-panel keypad access to control and diagnostics features, including:


Control
- Link capacity select
- Frequency/channel of operation

- Transmitter power adjustment

- Transmitter mute

- Link ID (1-255)

- Tributary status

- PIN access on/off


Diagnostics
- Dynamic RSL indication

- Current BER

- Alarm status

- Scrolling list of active alarms


• Wide DC input range of +/- 21.6 to 60Vdc

• Low power consumption

• All front-panel connectors for:

- Customer data

- Alarm relay

- Two integrated service channels

- Protection

- Network management

8–8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XP4 Plus IDU (Indoor unit)

IDU Configurations
Each IDU supports one of four capacities: 2x/4x, 4x/8x, E1 or DS-1, E3, or DS-3. E3 is
converted to 16E1 by adding an indoor rack-mounted multiplexer switching unit (MSU),
providing flexibility between 16E1 and E3 interfaces in a network. The IDU is
independent of any frequency band, thus simplifying maintenance and lowering the
overall cost of sparing. All IDUs are compatible with standard 19-inch EIA and ETSI rack
mounts.

AUX 1 AUX 2

M
L
IDU
OD
ON

CB
RE
MGMT 1 VT100
ALARMS
PROTECTION TRIBS 5-8

R
R

E TE

TE
Y

PIN G

IN
WE
CIT
EQ

US PU
F
K ID

L
Computer

CA R /

MO
CT

ED
IB C

CA
PO

SE /

IN OM
FR
PA

GG
LE
L
BE

RE
LIN

LO
RS

C
TR

LO
Tx

Tx
ODU ALARM RELAYS TRIBS 1-4 MGMT 2 10BT

Figure 8-9. Balanced / Unbalanced 2x/4x IDU

AUX 1 AUX 2 TRIBS 5-8


M
U
L
IDU
ON

CB
OD

RE

MGMT 2 10BT
ALARMS

TE
PIN G

IN TER

IN D
Tx ITY

ALARM RELAYS PROTECTION TRIBS 1-4


EQ

L
K ID

MO
CT

E
IB C
CA R /

CA
GG
SE /
R

US
FR

U
C

COMPUTER

LE
L

PO x
WE

MP
PA

RE
LIN

LO
T
RS
BE

LO
TR

CO
ODU MGMT 1 VT100

Figure 8-10. Balanced / Unbalanced 4x/8x E1 or DS-1 IDU

AUX 1

8
U

M
L
U
OD
CB
RE
ID
IN

MGMT 2 10BT

TX RX ALARMS
FG

IN TER
EQ

IN D

TE
Tx Y

LIN R

CT

ALARM RELAYS PROTECTION


K ID

E
E

AUX 2
CIT

IB C
WE

SE /

GG
FR

L
MO
CA R /

US
U

COMPUTER
LE

CA
L

PIN

MP
Tx
PA

PO
RS

TR

LO
BE

RE
LO
CO

ODU
MGMT 1 VT100

Figure 8-11. Unbalanced E3 or DS-3 IDU

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–9


XP4 Plus System Description

AUX 1
MGMT 2 10BT

TX RX ALARMS

FG
PROTECTION

Y
EQ
ALARM RELAYS AUX 2

TE
COMPUTER

CIT

IN TER

IN D
K ID

IB C

L
CA R /

E
R

MO
FR

CA
GG
C
WE
PA

SE /

US
U
L
BE

LIN

LE
TR

PIN

LO

RE
Tx

MP
RS

LO
Tx
PO

CO
ODU MGMT 1 VT100

TRIBS 5-8 TRIBS 13-16


A TX A RX HOT STANDBY

LOCKOUT
TRIBS 1-4 TRIBS 9-12 TX RX PROTECTION B

B TX B RX DIVERSITY

Figure 8-12. Balanced/ Unbalanced 16xE1 IDU/MSU

A block diagram of the IDU is shown in Figure 8-13. All of these functions are integrated
onto a single PC Board inside the IDU. An optional plug-in card is available to support the
Network Management Interface. A memory backup holds all relevant data so that, if the
IDU loses power, the unit will be operational when power is restored. The IDU has five
configurable alarm relay outputs (“Form C” dry contacts) and one external alarm input
sensor (0V detect).

In the transmit direction, data is input from the front panel connectors. This data is then
multiplexed into a composite data rate and passed through scrambling circuitry followed
by Forward Error Correction (FEC). The 2x/4x and 4x/8x FEC (BCH) circuitry is capable
of correcting 2 bits in a 512 bit block. The FEC circuitry for DS-3 and E3/16E1 products is
Reed Solomon, which is capable of correcting 8 bytes in a frame of 255 bytes.
Independent of actual data rate, the data is multiplexed into a constant bit rate with the
command, control, diagnostics and site-to-site communications, and sent through the
single coaxial cable to the ODU.

In the receive direction (from the ODU), the composite AMI signal is modulated, de-
multiplexed to the appropriate composite bit rate, and then passed through the FEC
circuitry and descrambler. The recovered composite data stream is de-multiplexed to the
tributary outputs and applicable auxiliary channels. The downlink (receive) carrier is 140
MHz for 2/4/8x and 233 MHz for E3/DS-3/16E1 systems.

8–10 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XP4 Plus IDU (Indoor unit)

2x/4x and 4x/8x IDU

E3/DS-3 IDU

Figure 8-13. XP4 Plus IDU Block Diagrams


PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–11
XP4 Plus System Description

XP4 Plus ODU (Outdoor Unit)


The XP4 Plus ODU provides the modem, IF, and RF functions of the radio. It has a
weatherproofed sealed assembly that latches onto an antenna and can be removed without
any tools and without affecting antenna alignment.

CLIP RETAINERS FOR


CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDE RF
ANTENNA ATTACHMENT
INTERFACE

AGC BNC
CONNECTOR

POLARIZATION
INDICATOR

N-TYPE CONNECTOR FOR


ODU-IDU CABLE

Figure 8-14. XP4 Plus ODU

The ODU receives its power from the IDU through a coaxial cable and converts these
signals to microwave frequencies for transmission. The ODU’s parameters are configured
and monitored through the IDU.

Features
• Dual data rate (2x/4x and 4x/8x systems)

• Fully tunable from IDU over ODU frequency range

• Output power controllable from IDU over at least 30 dB of range

• Integrated design incorporating MMIC technology

• Least amount of mounting hardware required in the industry

• Least obtrusive ODU assembly

8–12 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XP4 Plus ODU (Outdoor Unit)

• DC AGC voltage and audible alignment aid accessed via weatherproofed BNC con-
nection
• High Power option available for 13-23 GHz
ODUs are available in the following bands:

- 37.0 - 40.0 GHz for 38 GHz systems

- 27.35 to 31.3 GHz for 28/29/31 GHz systems (DS-1/DS-3 only)

- 24.25 - 26.5 GHz for 26 GHz systems (E1/E3 only)

- 24.25 - 25.25 GHz for 24 GHz systems (DS-1/DS-3 only)

- 21.2 - 23.6 GHz for 23 GHz systems

- 17.7 - 19.7 GHz for 18 GHz systems

- 14.4 - 15.35 GHz for 15 GHz systems

- 12.75 - 13.25 GHz for 13 GHz systems (E1/E3 only)

- 7.10 - 8.50 GHz for 7/8 GHz systems (E1/E3 only)


Depending on T-R spacing and Channel Plan requirements, ODU diplexers are designed
to cover frequency ranges of up to 560 MHz. Within the ODU frequency range, any
frequency plan can be established and implemented from the IDU. Capacity and transmit
power are also selected from the IDU.

Regardless of frequency plan, traffic capacity, or transmitter output power, no field


adjustments, switch settings or other modifications are required to operate an ODU within
its designated frequency range.

Architecture
The ODU consists of the following main components: diplexer, transceiver, signal
processor, microprocessor and power supply.

The power supply conditions the power sent up the center conductor of the single coaxial
cable from the IDU and translates the required voltages for the ODU. The raw DC input
voltage (24, 48, or 60 Volts typically) gets converted to voltages of +5, -5 & 12 VDC. 8
In the transmit direction, a constant multiplexed AMI data stream is sent via the cable to
the ODU. For any NxE1 or NxDS-1 system, this includes an aggregate bit rate of 18.7
Mbps and 40 MHz reference. For E3 and DS-3 systems, the data stream has an aggregate
bit rate of 37 Mbps and 49 Mbps respectively, at base band. The data stream contains the
transmit data as well as overhead control and status information. The data is sent at a
significant level so as to minimize susceptibility to EMI/RFI effects as well as IDU/ODU
ground potential differences.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–13


XP4 Plus System Description

The cable signals are shown in Figures 8-15 through 8-17.

1 8 .7 M b p s 1 8 .7 M b p s

TR A N S M IT A M I R E C E IV E AM I
D A TA D A TA

DC 40 MH z
14 0M H z
R EF ER EN C E

Figure 8-15. 2/4/8x XP4 Plus Cable Signals

37 Mbps 37 Mbps

TRANSMIT AMI RECEIVE AMI


DATA DATA

DC
233 MHz

Figure 8-16. E3/16xE1 XP4 Plus Cable Signals

49 Mbps 49 Mbps

TRANSMIT AMI RECEIVE AMI


DATA DATA

DC
233 MHz

Figure 8-17. DS-3 XP4 Plus Cable Signals

8–14 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XP4 Plus ODU (Outdoor Unit)

Once inside the ODU, this data is received and de-multiplexed according to the actual bit
rate selected in the signal processor. Overhead information between the ODU and IDU is
passed to the microprocessor. Other embedded overhead accompanies the composite bit
rate that is sent for further signal processing. Next, a traditional 4-level FSK modulation
scheme is implemented. The signal passes through a 4-level coder, a spectral shaping filter
and transmit modulation circuitry to condition the signal for the proper levels before
modulating the voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO). Frequency synthesis and control of
the transmit signal are achieved by state-of-the-art DDS (Direct Digital Synthesis) phase
lock circuitry under microprocessor control, using a very stable 20 MHz TCXO reference.
The synthesizer has a resolution of 0.25 MHz, which will accommodate most frequency
plans in use worldwide. A PIN diode attenuator provides at least 0-30 dB (0-20 dB for
high power versions) of variable attenuation in 0.5 dB steps, as well as mute attenuation of
50 dB. The modulated IF signal is then fed to the transmit circuitry of the transceiver
where it is converted up to the outgoing RF channel frequency. The output of the
transceiver is fed to the transmit diplexer, eliminating any unwanted spectral emissions
resulting from the modulation and multiplication process, and passed to the antenna feed
port.

In the receive direction, the incoming RF signal passes through the receive diplexer,
preventing unwanted RF from entering the receiver outside the tuning bandwidth. The
receive filter also prevents the terminal's own transmit frequency from interfering with the
receiver.

Next, the receive signal enters the receive circuitry of the transceiver, where it is converted
down to an IF signal. This RX IF frequency is down-converted to a second IF of 70 MHz,
amplified, and passed through a SAW channel filter. This highly selective SAW (surface
acoustic wave) filter limits the noise bandwidth of the system for better threshold
performance and provides superior adjacent-channel performance characteristics. The
signal then passes through a multi-stage IF amplifier, providing a linear voltage output
over a wide incoming receive signal level (RSL). For example, -80 dBm = 1Volt of AGC
and each 1 dB increase in RSL thereafter is equal to 0.1 volt increase in the AGC voltage.
RSL is displayed in dBm on the IDU LED display or on the LinkView main screen. The
signal is then demodulated, baseband filtered, sliced, and multiplexed to a constant bit
rate. The resulting AMI data stream is double side-band modulated onto a 140 MHz
carrier for 2x/4x/8x systems and a 233 MHz carrier for E3/16xE1/DS-3 systems and sent
down the single coaxial cable to the IDU. This signal is very robust with minimum
susceptibility to EMI/RFI effects.
8

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–15


8–16
VVA C ONTROL
TX IF DAUGHTER CAR TRANSCEIVER MODULE D

TX IF REF
ACTIVE
(FROM PLL 4 dB 10 d VVA VVA 6 dB B
LOOP vco
PROCESSOR SYNTHESIZER PAD PAD #1 #2 PAD
FILTER
CARD)

MOD

PORTION OF PROCESSOR CARD


XP4 Plus System Description

4-LEVEL
AMI RECEIVER DEMUX FILTER
CODER
XN
VCO TUNING VOLTAGE
(F ROM RX IF MAIN BOARD) TO/FROM
ANTENNA
VOLTAGE
TO/ POWER
CONTROLLED X N1 DIPLEXER
TAMI DIVIDER
FROM OSCILLATOR
IDU
N-PLEXER TO DC/DC CON VERTER DC/DC CONVERTER ,
VCO PRESCALER OUT PUT XN
SEQUENCING :M
(TO RX IF MAIN BOARD)
140 MHz ( LOW DATA RATE) CIRCUIT,
233 MHz (HIGH DATA RATE )
VOLTAGE
140/233 REGULATORS RX IF LO
MHz LO

RAMI

MUX
DEMOD
/RSSI

ADAPTIVE
SLICER

NIQUIST DEM OD 15 DB DEMOD


FILTER /RSS
SI PAD /RSSI

Figure 8-18. XP4 Plus ODU Block Diagram


PORTION OF RSSI
PROCESSOR RX RSL
OP AMP
CARD
SAW FILTER
DAUGHTER
CARD

FILTER S ELE CT

XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XP4 Plus ODU (Outdoor Unit)

Comparing the XP4 Plus and XP4 ODUs


In 2000, Stratex Networks introduced the XP4 Plus, an improved XP4 ODU with a design
that offers enhanced features and performance. The XP4 and the XP4 Plus are fully
interchangeable in a network or across a link. All new XP4 Plus units can directly replace
existing XP4 units in service and use the same IDUs.

The XP4 Plus replaces the Tx and Rx Hybrids used in prior XP4 units with a single Tx/Rx
transceiver design. The transceiver now mounts directly to the ODU baseplate, thus
reducing unit operating temperature and increasing unit reliability over the previous
model. Other advantages of the new XP4 Plus design include:

• Wider frequency coverage per ODU—in some cases the range can be extended to
560 MHz, allowing customers to operate on nearly twice as many designated channels.
The wider range also means that fewer sub-bands are necessary to cover entire fre-
quency bands. Customers find this especially convenient because fewer equipment
part numbers need to be controlled, purchased, and maintained in spare inventory.
• Increased RSL (receive signal level)—the new range of -80 to -30 dBm simplifies
installation for shorter paths.
• ETSI Grade B performance—this is now required in some countries for 23-38 GHz
frequency bands.
Table 8-2 identifies specific differences between the XP4 Plus and the XP4.

Table 8-2. Comparison between XP4 Plus and XP4 ODU

Comparison XP4 XP4 Plus

Hi-Power Option No Yes


ATPC Option No Yes
Wider Tuning Range No Yes
Order Wire Optional Optional
RF Loopback Yes Optional
Calibrated Tx Power Yes Yes
Calibrated Rx Level
Meets ETSI Class B
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
8
Terminal MTBF* 10 Years 12 Years

* The Terminal MTBF is a guaranteed value based on a


combination of empirical and expected field data. Field
MTBF is typically much higher than the 12 years
shown above.

As stated earlier, the XP4 Plus ODU and the XP4 ODU are fully interchangeable in the
field.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–17


XP4 Plus System Description

System Configuration
The XP4 Plus product range includes full software control and system configuration,
which eliminates the need for any hardware switches or factory installed options.
Software-based features can be accessed in either of two ways:

1 Through the front-panel keypad and display on each IDU


2 Through LinkView, a proprietary Stratex radio configuration and maintenance software
tool available as an option

Front Panel Controls


The front panel functions include all commands to configure a terminal, including alarms,
and to monitor performance. The configuration of both the local and remote terminals can
be displayed and changed from one end of the link. In addition to transmit/receive
frequencies, software selectable features include:

• Transmit power level

• Link ID code

• Receive level monitoring

• Alarm summary

• Capacity change

• Frequency channel selection

• Tributary configuration

Figure 8-19. IDU Speed Keys

The IDU speed keys are a unique feature of the radio. These front-panel keys, shown in
Figure 8-19, provide all of the on-site controls required to install, test, and commission a
link. This can be done without any external test equipment, resulting in major time and
cost savings. If the radio has been preset with the customer’s standard default parameters
either at the factory or at the user’s depot, a PC running LinkView is not required.

8–18 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


System Configuration

LinkView Maintenance Tool


Available from Stratex Networks as an option, LinkView proprietary software enables you
to configure and maintain a XP4 Plus radio link through a personal computer. LinkView is
the evolution of XPView, a first-generation program still used by some Stratex customers,
but no longer sold by Stratex Networks. Both software programs offer enhanced
configuration and maintenance tools beyond the controls available on the IDU’s front
panel. For more information about LinkView, see Using LinkView on page 4-2.

Stratex Network’s PC-based LinkView software package is available to control, configure,


and monitor an XP4 Plus terminal or link. The DB9 connector on the IDU front panel
provides an EIA RS232 interface to a standard IBM compatible PC running LinkView
software. This software program is ideally suited for setup and configuration of XP4 Plus
terminals. The XP4 Plus terminal data can be stored in files as records for future reference.
The LinkView main screen is shown in Figure 8-21.

The LinkView software package and Operators Manual are available from your local
Stratex Networks representative.

Besides added convenience, LinkView offers enhanced configuration and maintenance


tools beyond the controls available on the IDU’s front panel. The LinkView link
management system supports all XP4 frequency bands and capacities. Figure 8-20 gives
an example of the XP4 Plus with LinkView installed.

LinkView

ODU

Indoor -
Outdoor
Universal Cable
Wide DC
Indoor
Input
Unit
Range
(IDU)
All Digital
SELECT VIEW

Up/Down
Links w/o
1+1 Protection, IFs
EOW & Service SNMP
Channel Ready Option
Frequency Specific Components (7,8,13,15,18,23,24,26,28-31,38 GHz)

Capacity Range Specific Components (2x/4x, 4x/8x, 16E1, E3, DS3) 8


Customer Application Option

Figure 8-20. XP4 Plus Universal Radio Architecture

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–19


XP4 Plus System Description

Figure 8-21. LinkView Main Screen

Protected System
To guard against service interruptions, the XP4 Plus radio link can be operated in
protected mode, providing link continuity if a fault occurs in the primary radio. A
protected system is configured by adding an indoor rack-mounted protection switch unit
and another standby radio terminal. The ODUs may be connected to a waveguide coupler
or splitter, connected to one antenna, or directly connected to their own antennas. Figure
8-22 shows a protected configuration for E3 and DS-3 capacities.

8–20 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Protected System

Figure 8-22. Protected Configuration

Hitless receive switching is provided on E3, 16E1, and DS-3 systems.


The protection switch is activated by an alarm condition in the primary link. The
following alarm conditions will trigger a switch from the primary to the secondary radio:

• Loss of lock on transmit signal

• Loss of transmit power

• Frame loss (receive)

• BER alarm

• Loss of IDU transmit signal

• DC power loss 8
• Cable fault

• Loss of tributary input to online IDU (for E3, DS-3, and 16E1 systems)
For more information on alarms, see “Chapter 7, Troubleshooting and Maintaining the
XP4 Plus System.”

The protection switch unit can be operated in one of four modes:

1 Hot Standby—Only one transmitter is online at any one time. Both main and standby
terminals are tuned to the same frequency. A fault detected in the online radio terminal
PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–21
XP4 Plus System Description

results in a switch of traffic to the offline radio terminal.


2 Frequency Diversity—The main and standby radios are transmitting simultaneously
and are tuned to different frequencies (at least two channels apart) to avoid interference.
When a fault is detected on the active radio, the traffic is switched to the standby radio.
3 Dual Link (8x systems)—The main and standby radios are transmitting
simultaneously and are tuned to different frequencies to avoid interference. Under
normal operating conditions, the primary radio carries traffic for tributaries 1 through 8
and the standby radio carries traffic for tributaries 9 through 16. A fault detected in the
traffic of the first eight tributaries results in an automatic switch of those tributaries to
the standby radio, disabling tributaries 9 through 16. A fault detected in the traffic of
tributaries 9 through 16 will raise alarms but no switching will result.
4 Space Diversity (E3/16E1 and DS-3 systems)—The main and standby radios are set
up in Hot Standby mode, but are connected to their own antennas. Both antennas,
separated by a specific distance, are receiving the signal transmitted from the online
radio at the other end of the link. If a fault occurs in the receiving end of the link, the
traffic is switched to the standby radio without causing errors (hitless receive
switching). As in Hot Standby mode, a fault detected in the online transmitter causes
that transmitter to mute and the standby radio to unmute.
For information on installing a protection system, refer to “Chapter 2, Installing the XP4
Plus.”

For information on commissioning a protection system, refer to “Chapter 4, Configuring


the XP4 Plus.”

IDU/ODU Protected Configurations


The XP4Plus protected system includes a primary IDU, a secondary IDU, and a protection
switch. The 2x/4x/8x protection switch and the 16xE1 MSU are available with either
balanced or unbalanced DB25 traffic connections. The E3 and DS-3 switching units have
unbalanced BNC traffic connectors. Figures 8-23 through 8-25 show the protected
configurations for the IDU.

Figure 8-23. 4x/8xE1 IDUs in Protected Configuration

8–22 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Protected System

Figure 8-24. E3 or DS-3 IDUs in Protected Configuration

Figure 8-25. Figure 17. 16xE1 System in Protected


Configuration

There are two typical installation configurations for the ODUs: dual ODU/single antenna
configuration and dual ODU/dual antenna configuration.

Dual ODU/Single Antenna Configuration


In the dual ODU/single antenna configuration, the XP4 Plus ODUs attach to a coupler or
splitter that attaches directly to an antenna with an XP-type interface.

The Stratex dual ODU direct mount waveguide coupler or splitter combines the outputs

8
and inputs of two standard XP4Plus ODUs to an antenna. The coupler provides an unequal
6:2 dB configuration and the splitter provides an equal 3:3 dB configuration.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–23


XP4 Plus System Description

Figure 8-26. Dual ODU/Single Antenna Protection Configuration

Dual ODU/Dual Antenna Configuration


The dual ODU/dual antenna configuration employs two of the single ODU/single antenna
arrangements typically used in an unprotected system. If required, the ODUs may be
mounted remotely using a dual ODU remote pole mount without the coupler/splitter
hardware.

The dual ODU/dual antenna configuration is required for Space Diversity protection
systems.

Figure 8-27. Dual ODU/Dual Antenna Protection Configuration

8–24 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Network Management (NMI) Card Option

Protection Switch
The key component in a protected system is the protection switch. The protection switch is
connected to two IDUs, each connected by cable to an ODU. A protected system consists
of two IDUs and two ODUs at the local (customer premise) end of the link and two IDUs
and two ODUs at the remote end. When a transmission or receiving failure occurs, the
protection switch re-directs traffic to the “back-up” unit.

The switch is available with balanced or unbalanced DB25 interfaces for 2x/4x/8x
systems. E3 and DS-3 systems connect to a Switching Unit (SU) with a BNC traffic
interface. 16E1 systems, which have a DB25 traffic interface, use a multiplexer switching
unit (MSU) that provides E3 to 16E1 conversion as well as the switching function. Traffic
connections between the protection shelf and IDUs are made on the front panel.

The protection switch monitors both direct-mount XP4 Plus terminals and, upon an alarm
status in either terminal, makes a decision as to which of the two XP4 Plus terminals
should be online (carrying traffic). All traffic and protection connections are on the IDU
front panel.

For 2x/4x systems, the choice of operation in Hot Standby or Frequency Diversity
protection mode is set by the front panel mounted rocker switch on the protection switch.
8x systems include an additional position for Dual Link mode. E3, 16E1, and DS-3
provide a choice between Hot Standby/Space Diversity and Frequency Diversity modes
using a two-position rocker switch. LEDs clearly indicate the switch setting.

Either XP4 Plus terminal may be forced online for maintenance purposes using a three-
position front panel mounted rocker switch. LEDs clearly indicate which XP4 Plus
terminal is online and whether the protection switch is in auto or manual switch mode.

For information on installing a protection switch and examples of the various protection
switch configurations, see Installing a Protected IDU on page 2-24.

Network Management (NMI) Card Option


Available as an option, Stratex Network’s NMI (Network Management Interface) card
offers SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) compatibility for management of
all XP4 Plus radio systems.

The NMI plug-in module, with connections located on the front panel of each IDU,
includes the following interfaces:
8
• EIA RS232 VT100 configuration port on a RJ-45 socket

• 2 x EIA RS232/422/485 SNMP SLIP ports on RJ-45 sockets

• Ethernet port on RJ-45


The connections for the NMI plug-in module on some older NMI cards are located on the
rear panel of the IDU. Also, some older cards may support 10 Base 2 Ethernet through a
BNC connector on the back of the card.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–25


XP4 Plus System Description

The SNMP option offers fault monitoring and management, radio and network
management configuration, performance monitoring and management, security
management, code download via TFTP, and dial-out and dial-in capabilities.

Fault Monitoring and Management


Every alarm generated has a numeric alarm index (0 … 18), an alarm source (local or
remote), an alarm severity (minor, major or critical) and an alarm description. Each alarm
generated may also generate an SNMP trap. The trap will include the alarm source,
severity, and description as well as an alarm state (active or inactive) and a timestamp. All
traps may be sent to three different destinations to be viewed. Traps will not be sent if the
trap destinations are not configured and if trap generation is not enabled.

Every alarm generated is logged by the SNMP interface in an event log. The event log is
capable of storing the latest 100 events. Every event logged has a text description,
severity, timestamp and a source. An event is logged each time an alarm is raised as well
as when it is cleared.

The SNMP interface indicates the highest severity of the alarm currently active. The
values are No Severity, Minor, Major or Critical. This is useful when determining, from a
top-level management view, whether the radio system is in an alarm state and, if so, the
severity of that state.

An alarm filter is also available. Every possible alarm may be filtered, meaning
configured to not generate an alarm and configured to not generate a trap. Alarms may be
filtered individually or all alarms may be filtered together.
In addition to the above mentioned alarm traps, a node active trap may also be generated.
The node active trap provides indication of an alive and healthy radio. Once daily, a node
active trap may be sent from each radio configured to send a node active trap, or
“heartbeat” trap.

Every radio status attribute, when queried, returns the current status of the radio. There is
a local and a remote radio for every radio link; therefore, every radio has a local and a
remote status indication. At all times, this status should be reflective of the actual status of
the radio. An unsolicited message is sent to the SNMP interface, from the radio, each time
there is a change in the radio status.

Radio and Network Management Configuration


All of the available radio and network management configuration parameters may be
changed or viewed using SNMP SET and GET commands. The SNMP MIB provided for
network management of the XP4 Plus radios indicates the security access level and the
limitations (if any) on valid entries for each of the parameters (for example, Link ID can
be set to 0-255, anything else is invalid and should return an SNMP SET error).

8–26 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Network Management (NMI) Card Option

Performance Monitoring and Management


G.821 and G.826 performance statistics are recorded by the SNMP option board. The
performance statistics are gathered from the radio and recorded in 15-minute intervals.
Every fifteen minutes, a performance “bin” is generated with the statistics from the
previous 15 minutes. The bins are recorded on the 15-minute mark of every hour (i.e.
12:00, 12:15, 12:30, 12:45 and 1:00). The SNMP option module will record 7 days worth
of performance statistics. On the 8th day, the first day's statistics are overwritten. The
SNMP option board is designed to store 96 quarterly “bins” (15-minutes each) and 7 daily
“bins” (24-hours each).

The G.821 performance statistics recorded by the SNMP option module are as follows:

• G.821 Errored Seconds


• G.821 Severely Errored Seconds
• G.821 Degraded Minutes
• G.821 Available Seconds
• G.821 Unavailable Seconds
The G.826 performance statistics recorded by the SNMP option module are as follows:

• G.826 Block Errors


• G.826 Errored Seconds
• G.826 Errored Seconds Ratio
• G.826 Severely Errored Seconds
• G.826 Severely Errored Seconds Ratio
• G.826 Background Block Errors
• G.826 Background Block Error Ratio
• G.826 Available Seconds
• G.826 Unavailable Seconds
8
Security Management
The SNMP option allows for up to 25 user accounts to be configured per option module.
Of these 25 user accounts, at least one must be configured as an Administration user. The
three levels of security allowed are Administration, Maintenance and View Only. The
SNMP option module will not allow the last Administration user to be deleted; thus
protecting the highest level of security integrity.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–27


XP4 Plus System Description

Code Download via TFTP


New embedded software code versions may be downloaded to the radio (IDU and ODU),
to the SU or MSU, and to the NMI option module via SNMP. The process utilized for code
download is TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol).

Dial-out Capability
The SNMP interface may be configured to automatically initiate a dial-out upon TRAP
generation. The trap may have been locally generated, or routed from a remote SNMP
interface. Using one of the two available serial ports allows for dial-out configuration.

Dial-in Capability
The SNMP interface may be configured to allow a remote user to dial-in to the interface
via an externally connected modem. Using one of the two available serial ports allows for
dial-in configuration.

For details regarding installation of the NMI option, see “Chapter 5, Configuring the
Network Management Interface Option.” To order the NMI option or for further details,
contact your area’s Stratex Networks Sales Representative.

Auxiliary Data Channels Option


The XP4 Plus Auxiliary Data Channels option provides access to two 72 kbps overhead
channels between XP4 Plus terminals in a link. These channels feature:

• One balanced data channel (EIA RS422) and one unbalanced (EIA RS232)

• Both data channels may be used simultaneously

• Each data channel includes a clock as well as data signal.

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) Option


Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is the capability of an XP4 Plus system to
automatically vary the local transmitter power based on the remote RSL (received signal
level) to maintain a target remote RSL.
If a path fade reduces the RSL of the remote terminal by 3dB or greater, the local terminal
adjusts its transmit output power in 1dB increments to return the remote RSL to the
desired level. The remote RSL is polled every two seconds. The ATPC option allows the
operator to vary the transmit power over the entire transmit range of the XP4 Plus ODU. If
a Tx power level is not specified, then the maximum range is the default.

When the condition causing the path fade is removed and the remote RSL rises, the local
transmitter reduces power to return the RSL to the desired level. ATPC can be configured
from both the local and remote radios.

8–28 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU)

If the link fails (e.g. during heavy rainfall), local transmit power will remain at maximum
until the link is reestablished (e.g. rainfall decreases), then transmit power will be lowered
to track the corresponding remote RSL.

Example of ATPC Operation


Baseline RSL
-55 dBm

-57 dBm

-58 dBm
ATPC Threshold

System Adjusts Far End TX power in


Threshold Limit Reached 1 dBm increments until RSL returns
to baseline.

Benefits of ATPC include:

• Improved service reliability and availability

• Reduced interference with neighboring systems also using ATPC

• Increased link planning density when used alongside other ATPC-enabled XP4 Plus
radios
• A recent study by an independent research authority concluded that ATPC with a range
of 20 dB yields link density improvements of up to 169 percent. With the ATPC
option, the transmit power can be varied over the entire transmit range of the XP4 Plus
ODU. If a Tx power level is not specified, then the maximum range is the default.
For information on activating the ATPC option, see Activating ATPC on page 6-2.

The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) 8


The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) transforms the XP4 Plus into an end-to-end wireless IP
solution for ISP carriers and private network applications. The EIU is a compact,
configuration-free, and easy-to-install external module that provides a full 100 Base-T
interface with 64 Mbps of duplex bandwidth for an E3 system and 84 Mbps for DS-3.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–29


XP4 Plus System Description

Key features of the EIU include:

Fast Ethernet Data Interface

• Full Duplex IEEE 802.3u 100 Base-T

• Single Customer Data Port

• Flow Control Supported IEEE 802.3x

• Drops bad packets

• 4 Mbit Buffer
System Parameters

• 32 Mbps (E3), 42 Mbps (DS-3)

• Used with Standard 7 GHz to 38 GHz XP4 Plus radios

• DC power input of +/-24 VDC to +/-60 VDC

• Power Consumption <5W


Succinct status and diagnostic features using LEDs and built-in self-test algorithm

For information on installing the EIU, see The Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) section
on page 6–2.

The Network Order Wire


As an accessory to the XP4 Plus series of digital microwave radios, the Network Order
Wire unit provides a programmable full-function network call system. Featuring a
programmable site identification number, service personnel can use the order wire to
communicate with all sites in a network. In addition to individual locations,
communication can also be established with groups of selected sites.
The system connects to the AUX #2 RS422 port on the IDU and uses a standard telephone
to program site identification numbers and dial other sites. Digitally coded voice
information is transmitted on the radio's auxiliary overhead channel at a rate of 64 to 124
Kbps, allowing the order wire to be used without affecting link activity.

8–30 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Engineering Order Wire (EOW) Handset

For installation information, see Installing the Network Order Wire on page 6–9.

Engineering Order Wire (EOW) Handset


The engineering order wire (EOW) handset provides voice connection between ends of a
radio link using the AUX #1 RS232 digital overhead channel (see Figure 8-28).
Digitally coded voice information is transmitted over the digital channel at a rate of 72
kbps. The handset is a fully integrated system and is connected to the AUX #1 RS232
service port located on the front panel of the IDU.

Figure 8-28. Radio Link with EOW Connection


8
Contained within the handset are the necessary RS232 converters, voice analog coders/
decoders, and signaling circuits. A push-button ringer is located on the back of the handset
handle. Power to the handset is provided through the AUX #1 connector.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 8–31


XP4 Plus System Description

Alarm Relays
The XP4 Plus radio system includes one external alarm input and five external alarm relay
outputs through an ALARM RELAYS DB15 connector on the IDU front panel. The XP4
Plus discrete alarm conditions are mapped using LinkView to one or more of the five
external alarm relay outputs. The relays are intended for use with a customer's existing
external alarm collection and monitoring system (i.e., SCADA or similar) when
connection to a network management system is not available. Many of the customer's
external monitoring systems can be configured to dial out to a pager or a central control
point. See External Alarm Relays on page 6-13 for information on configuring the relays..

Figure 8-29. Alarm Relays Connector

8–32 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


1
A

XP4 Plus Technical Specifications


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
Included in this appendix are the technical specifications for the XP4 Plus DS-1/DS-3 and
the XP4 Plus E1/E3 radios.

XP4 Plus DS-1/DS-3 Specifications


High Frequency System Parameters

Operating Frequency 15 to 38 GHz Digital Line Rate DS-1, DS-3


Capacities 4x, 8x 1.5 Mbps (DS-1); Digital Line Code DS-1: AMI or B8ZS;
1x 45 Mbps (DS-3) DS-3: B3ZS
1
28DS-1 , 100 Base-T
2 Bit Rate DS-1: 1.544 Mbps, DS-3:
44.736 Mbps
Forward Error Correction (FEC) 4/8xDS-1; BCH IDU to ODU Cable Belden 9913 (RG-8) or
DS-3; Reed Solomon similar
50Ω, 300m (1000 ft)
max
IDU-ODU Cable Connector N-Type

System 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 24 GHz 28/29/31 GHz 38 GHz

Frequency Range, 14.4 - 15.39 17.7 - 19.7 21.2 - 23.6 24.25 - 25.25 27.35 - 31.3 38.6 - 40.00
GHz
T-R Spacing, MHz 475 1560 1200, 600 800 410, 1975, 255, 490 700, 1000
Modulation Type 4FSK

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 A–1


XP4 Plus Technical Specifications

System 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 24 GHz 28/29/31 GHz 38 GHz

System Gain at 10-6


108 dB 108 dB 103 dB 99 98 97
BER3 4DS-1
-6
System Gain at 10
3 105 dB 106 dB 101 dB 96 95 94
BER 8DS-1
-6
System Gain at 10
102 dB 104 dB 97 dB 93 92 91
BER3 DS-3
Tuning Range Up to 560 MHz4
Link ID Codes 255
Loopbacks 4DS-1, Tributary, IDU, ODU, RF
5
8DS-1
Loopbacks DS-3 Tributary, IDU, ODU, RF5, SU

Transmitter 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 24 GHz 28/29/31 GHz 38 GHz

Power Output +19 dBm +18 dBm +17 dBm +17 dBm +16 dBm +16 dBm
Standard
Power Output High +26 dBm +25 dBm +21 dBm
Transmitter Source Synthesized VCO

Frequency Stability
* + - 10 ppm

Modulation Type 4 FSK


Power Control
Dynamic Range Standard Power 30 dB, High Power 20 dB
Transmitter Mute
Level < -30 dBm
Channel Selection Digital Synthesizer
Synthesizer 0.25 MHz
Resolution

Receiver 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 24 GHz 28/29/31 GHz 38 GHz

Receiver Source Synthesized VCO

Frequency Stability
* + - 10 ppm

BER 10-6 Threshold - 81 dBm - 80 dBm - 77 dBm - 77 dBm - 77 dBm - 75 dBm


4DS-1
8DS-1 - 78 dBm - 77 dBm - 74 dBm - 74 dBm - 74 dBm - 72 dBm
DS-3 - 73 dBm - 72 dBm - 71 dBm - 71 dBm - 71 dBm - 69 dBm
-3
BER 10 Threshold - 84 dBm - 83 dBm - 82 dBm - 82 dBm - 82 dBm - 80 dBm
4DS-1
8DS-1 - 81 dBm - 80 dBm - 79 dBm - 79 dBm - 79 dBm - 76 dBm
DS-3 - 76 dBm - 75 dBm - 74 dBm - 74 dBm - 74 dBm - 72 dBm
Maximum RX level,
-3
BER <10 > -20 dBm

A–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XP4 Plus DS-1/DS-3 Specifications

Residual Bit Error


Rate6 (4/8DS-1) RBER -< 10-10
Residual Bit Error
6 -12
Rate (DS-3) RBER -< 10

Protected Network System External Alarms A


Additional Protection System Losses External Alarm Input 1 - TTL DB15
6 dB Coupler 1.6/6.4 dB External Alarm Output 5 - Form DB15
3 dB Splitter 3.3/3.5 dB 'C' Relay

Available System Configurations Digital Auxiliary Channels

Non-protected, 1+0 15 to 38 GHz Electrical Physical


Protected Hot Standby, 1+1 15 to 38 GHz Interface Interface
Protected Frequency Diversity, 1+1 15 to 38 GHz Quantity 2
Protected Space Diversity, 1+1 15 to 38 GHz Interface Port #1, EIA DB9
Unbalanced RS232 Female
Operating Environment Port #2, EIA DB9
Balanced RS422 Female
Altitude 15,000 ft (4,500 meters) Line Rate 72 kbps synchronous
Operating Temperature IDU -10 to +50ºC Electrical
Operating Temperature ODU -33 to 55ºC
Standards Compliance Input Voltage Range ±21.6 to 72 Vdc
EMC (IDU & ODU) ETS 300 385 Power
Operation, IDU ETS 300 019 Class 3.2 Consumption IDU
Operation, ODU ETS 300 019 Class 4.1 IDU without Option Board 12W
Storage, IDU & ODU ETS 300 019 Class 1.2 IDU with NMI Option 15W
Transportation, IDU & ODU ETS 300 019 Class 2.3 1+1 Protection switch 8W
FCC Compliance Part 101 ODU
NEBS Compliance GR-63-CORE, GR-1089- Standard Power 38W
CORE High Power 43W
Emission BW 4DS-1 8DS-1 DS-3 1+1 Protection switch 8W

All Bands 5MHz 10MHz 36MHz Protection 3.15A Slow-Blow Fuse


Circuit
ITU Designator 4DS-1 8DS-1 DS-3
All Bands 5M00F7WDT 10M0F7WDT 36M0F7WDT Mechanical

Network Management Interface (Optional) IDU 1+1 Protection Switch


(4/8DS-1)
Physical Height 45 mm 43 mm
Electrical Interface Interface (1.75 in.) (1.75 in.)
VT100 Config. Port EIA RS232 RJ-45 Width 480 mm 480 mm
SNMP Serial Port 1 EIA RS232/422 RJ-45 (19 in.) (19 in.)
SNMP Serial Port 2 EIA RS232/422 RJ-45 Depth 250 mm 145 mm
10 Base-T Port Ethernet RJ-45 (9.8 in.) (5.7 in.)
Protocol SNMP Weight 3.4 kg 2.0 kg
Performance Monitoring To ITU-T Rec. G.821/G826 (7.4 lb) (4.5 lb)

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 A–3


XP4 Plus Technical Specifications

Network Management Stratex Networks’ ProVision NMS or MIB


browser Switch Unit M13 Mux 100 Base-
(SU) (DS- (28DS-1) T EIU
3)
Height 45 mm 45 mm 44.5 mm
(1.75 in.) (1.7 in.) (1.75 in.)
Configuration Tools Width 480 mm 432 mm 432 mm
(19 in.) (17 in.) (7.5 in.)
Local Maintenance LinkView, a PC-based software package for Depth 250 mm 201 mm 165 mm
Terminal setup,fault management and configuration. (9.8 in.) (7.9 in.) (6.5 in.)
Antenna Port Weight 3.2 kg 2.5 kg 1.4 kg (3
(7.0 lb) (5.5 lb) lb)
Direct mount XP-type interface ODU
Standard waveguide flange for remote ODU mounting Diameter 230 mm (9.1 in.)
Depth 158mm (6.2 in.)
Weight 3.7 kg (8.1 lb.)
*10-year life and full temperature range

Notes: 1. M13 Mux connected to DS-3.


2. Ethernet Interface Unit connected to DS-3.
3. System Gains calculated using High Output Power value, where available.
4. Dependent on T-R spacing and channel plan requirements.
5. RF Loopback is available for 23 GHz and 38 GHz Systems.
-3
6. When RSL is between 10 and 40 dB above BER 10 threshold with FEC enabled.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.


All Power Output, Frequency Stability, Receiver Threshold, and System Gain data are typical values.

XP4 and ProVision are trademarks of Stratex Networks. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
XP4 and ProVision meet all relevant directives and are entitled to carry the CE mark.

©2002 Stratex Networks

A–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XP4 Plus E1/E3 Specifications

XP4 Plus E1/E3 Specifications


System Parameters Interface Parameters

Operating Frequency 7 to 38 GHz Digital Line Rate 2.048 Mbps (E1), 34.638
Mbps (E3) A
Capacities 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x 2 Mbps (E1); Digital Line Code HDB3
1x 34 Mbps (E3)
Error Correction 2x/4x 4x/8x; BCH IF (IDU to ODU) Cable Belden 9913 (RG-8) or
E3/16E1; Reed Solomon similar
IF Cable Connector N-Type

System 7/8 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz

Frequency Range, 7.10 - 8.50 12.75 - 13.25 14.4 - 15.35 17.7 - 19.7 21.2 - 23.6 24.25 - 26.5 37.0 - 39.5
GHz
T-R Spacing, MHz 119, 126, 266 315, 420, 475, 340, 1010, 1008, 1200, 1008 1260
151.614, 154 490, 644, 728 1560 1232
Modulation Type 4FSK
-6
System Gain at 10
114 dB 111 dB 113 dB 110 dB 109 dB 104 dB 101 dB
BER1 2E-1

System Gain at 10-6


112 dB 109 dB 111 dB 108 dB 106 dB 101 dB 98 dB
BER1 4E-1
-6
System Gain at 10
1 110 dB 107 dB 108 dB 105 dB 104 dB 98 dB 95 dB
BER 8E-1

System Gain at 10-6


108 dB 105 dB 105 dB 102 dB 101 dB 95 dB 92 dB
BER1 16E1, E3
Tuning Range Up to 580 MHz2
Loopbacks 2E1, 4E1, Tributary, IDU, ODU, RF
3
8E1
Loopbacks 16E1, E3 Tributary, IDU, ODU, RF, MSU3

Transmitter 7/8 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz

Power Output +25 dBm +19 dBm +19 dBm +18 dBm +17 dBm +17 dBm +16 dBm
Standard
Power Output High +27 dBm +26 dBm +25 dBm +21 dBm
Transmitter Source Synthesized VCO

Frequency Stability* + - 10 ppm

Modulation Type 4 FSK


Power Control Standard Power 30 dB, High Power 20 dB
Dynamic Range
Transmitter Mute < -30 dBm
Level

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 A–5


XP4 Plus Technical Specifications

Channel Selection Digital Synthesizer


Synthesizer 0.25 MHz
Resolution

Receiver 7/8 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz

Receiver Source Synthesized VCO

Frequency Stability * + - 10 ppm

BER 10-6 Threshold


2E1 - 84 dBm - 83 dBm - 83 dBm - 82 dBm - 83.5 dBm - 79 dBm - 79.5 dBm
4E1 - 82 dBm - 81 dBm - 81 dBm - 80 dBm - 80.5 dBm - 76 dBm - 76.5 dBm
8E1 - 79 dBm - 78 dBm - 78 dBm - 77 dBm - 77.5 dBm - 73 dBm - 73.5 dBm
16E1, E3 - 76 dBm - 75 dBm - 75 dBm - 74 dBm - 74.5 dBm - 70 dBm - 70.5 dBm
-3
BER 10 Threshold
2E1 - 87 dBm - 86 dBm - 86 dBm - 85 dBm - 87 dBm - 84 dBm - 85 dBm
4E1 - 85 dBm - 84 dBm - 84 dBm - 83 dBm - 84 dBm - 81 dBm - 82 dBm
8E1 - 82 dBm - 81 dBm - 81 dBm - 80 dBm - 81 dBm - 78 dBm - 79 dBm
16E1, E3 - 79 dBm - 78 dBm - 78 dBm - 77 dBm - 78 dBm - 75 dBm - 76 dBm
Maximum RX level,
-3
BER <10 > -20 dBm

Residual Bit Error


4 -10
Rate (2/4/8E1) RBER < 10
Residual Bit Error
4 -11
Rate (16E1/E3) RBER -< 10

Protected Network System External Alarms

Additional Protection System Losses External Alarm Input 1 - TTL DB15


6 dB Coupler 1.6/6.4 dB External Alarm Output 5 - Form 'C' DB15
3 dB Splitter 3.5/3.5 dB Relay

Available System Configurations Digital Auxiliary Channels

Non-protected, 1+0 7 to 38 GHz Electrical Physical


Protected Hot Standby, 1+1 7 to 38 GHz Interface Interface
Protected Frequency Diversity, 1+1 7 to 38 GHz Quantity 2
Protected Space Diversity, 1+1 7 to 38 GHz Interface Port #1, EIA RS232 DB9 Female
Unbalanced
Operating Environment Port #2, EIA RS422 DB9 Female
Balanced
Altitude 15,000 ft (4,500 meters) Line Rate 72 kbps synchronous
Operating Temperature IDU -10 to +50ºC
Operating Temperature ODU -33 to 55ºC

A–6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


XP4 Plus E1/E3 Specifications

Standards Compliance Electrical


EMC (IDU & ODU) ETS 301 489, EN50082-2 Input Voltage Range ±21.6 to 72 Vdc
Operation, IDU ETS 300 019 Class 3.2
Operation, ODU ETS 300 019 Class 4.1
Storage, IDU & ODU
Transportation, IDU & ODU
ETS 300 019 Class 1.2
ETS 300 019 Class 2.3
Power
Consumption IDU
A
IDU without Option Board 12W
IDU with NMS Option 15W
1+1 Protection switch 8W
16E1 Mux (MSU) 10W
Emission BW (MHz)2E1 4E1 8E1 16E1/E3 ODU
18 GHz 3.5 7 13.75 27.5 Standard Power 38W
All Other Bands 3.5 7 14 28 High Power 43W
Protection 3.15A Slow-Blow Fuse
ITU Designator 2E1 4E1 8E1 16E1/E3 Circuit

18 GHz 3M50F7WDT 7M50F7WDT 13M75F7WDT27M5F7WDT Mechanical


All Other Bands 3M50F7WDT 7M00F7WDT 14M0F7WDT 28M0F7WDT

Network Management Interface (Optional) IDU 1+1 Protection Switch


(2/4/8E1)
Physical Height 45 mm 45 mm (1.75 in.)
Electrical Interface Interface (1.75 in.)
VT100 Config. Port EIA RS232 RJ-45 Width 480 mm 480 mm (19 in.)
SNMP Serial Port 1 EIA RS232/422 RJ-45 (19 in.)
SNMP Serial Port 2 EIA RS232/422 RJ-45 Depth 250 mm 145 mm (5.7 in.)
10 Base-T Port Ethernet RJ-45 (9.8 in.)
Protocol SNMP Weight 3.4 kg 2.0 kg (4.5 lb)
Performance Monitoring To ITU-T Rec. G.821/G826 (7.4 lb)
Network Management Stratex Networks’ ProVision NMS or MIB
browser MSU (16E1) Switch Unit (SU) (E3)
Height 45 mm 45 mm (1.75 in.)
(1.75 in.)
Configuration Tool Width 480 mm 480 mm (19 in.)
(19 in.)
Local Maintenance LinkView, a PC-based software package for Depth 250 mm 250 mm (9.8 in.)
Terminal setup,fault management and configuration. (9.8 in.)
Antenna Port Weight 3.2 kg 3.2 kg (7.0 lb)
(7.0 lb)
Direct antenna mounting
XP-type interface ODU
Standard waveguide flange option available Diameter 230 mm (9.1 in.)
Depth 158mm (6.2 in.)
Weight 3.7 kg (8.1 lb.)
*
10-year life and full temperature range

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 A–7


XP4 Plus Technical Specifications

Notes: 1. System gains calculated using High Output Power value, where available.
2. Dependent on T-R spacing and channel plan requirements.
3. RF Loopback is available for 23 GHz, 26 GHz, and 38 GHz systems.
-3
4. When RSL is between 10 and 40 dB above BER 10 threshold with FEC enabled.

All specifications are subject to change without notice.


All Power Output, Frequency Stability, Receiver Threshold, and System Gain data are typical values.

XP4 and ProVision are trademarks of Stratex Networks. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. XP4
and ProVision meet all relevant directives and are entitled to carry the CE mark.

©2002 Stratex Networks

A–8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


1

Part Number Methodology


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
This appendix includes a breakdown of the part numbers for both ODUs and IDUs.

ODU Part Numbers


The information required to select an ODU is:

• General Frequency Band

• Transmit to Receive (T-R) Spacing

• Specific Frequency Sub-band

• Data Rate/Capacity

• Option (High power, RF loopback, etc.)

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 B–1


Part Number Methodology

To expedite ODU part number selection, it might be useful to understand the ODU part
numbering system. A Transmit Low ODU must be matched with a Transmit High ODU to
have a matched pair for a link.

8X 0-2X X X X X -X X X
S e le c t X P 4 T yp e
4 = XP 4
6 = XP 4P LUS

S e le c t P L U S O p tio n T yp e S e le c t S ub -B a nd
0 = S tandard P ower 01 = B and 1 09 = B and 9
1 = High P ower (13-23 GHz Only) 02 = B and 2 10 = B and 10
2 = RF -Loopback (23 and 38 GHz Only) 03 = B and 3 11 = B and 11
3 = Hi P ower/ RF Loopback (23G Hz) 04 = B and 4 12 = B and 12
05 = B and 5 13 = B and 13
06 = B and 6 14 = B and 14
S e le c t C a p a c ity 07 = B and 7 15 = B and 15
08 = B and 8 16 = B and 16
1 = 2x /4x E 1
2 = 4x /8x E 1 or D S-1
3 = E 3/16E 1 S e le c t T ra ns m it H ig h o r L o w
4 = DS 3 1 = T x Low
2 = T x High
S e le c t F re q u e nc y B a nd

07 = 7G Hz 24 = 24 G Hz
08 = 8G Hz 26 = 26 G Hz
13 = 13G Hz 28 = 28/29/31 G Hz
15 = 15G Hz 38 = 38 G Hz
18 = 18G Hz
23 = 23G Hz

S e le c t T ra ns m it-R e c e ive (T -R ) S p a c ing & D a ta R a te


Refer to "XP 4 M arketing O rder Num ber S tandard", 000-000014-S T D, for Configurations

E x a m p le : 8 4 0 -2 0 2 2 3 4 -0 2 1 is a 2 3 G H z 4 x /8 x O D U
1 0 0 8 T -R B a nd 2 L o w T x R a ng e 2 2 2 9 0 -2 2 5 9 0 M H z

B–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


IDU Part Numbers

IDU Part Numbers


XP4 Plus IDUs are frequency independent; each IDU can work with any frequency ODU.
The IDU is selected based on the data rate and capacity required.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 B–3


1

C
R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
Intended Use of Equipment for European Union
The enclosed equipment is classified under the R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC as a class 2.8
radio (microwave fixed link) product. Point-to-point radio relay equipment is intended to
be used for interconnecting typically private and public networks and for interconnecting
mobile base stations back to the PSTN point of presence (POP). The XP4 equipment
operates in fixed bands between 7 GHz and 38 GHz and is available in capacities of 2E1,
4E1, 8E1, 16E1, and E3.

For details of where the equipment is intended to be used, refer to the country matrix
below. A license to operate this apparatus is likely required and the appropriate regulatory
administration should be contacted.
Stratex Networks intends to market this equipment where a cross (X) is shown.
Note: The information contained in this document has been gathered from
the relevant government authorities.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 C–1


R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC

Luxembourg
Netherlands

Switzerland
Denmark

Germany

Portugal
Belgium

Sweden
Austria

Norway
Finland

Ireland
Greece
France

Spain
Italy

UK
7/8 GHz 2/4E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7/8 GHz 4/8E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7/8 GHz 16E1/E3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X
13 GHz 2/4E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X
13 GHz 4/8E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
13 GHz E3/16E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
15 GHz 2/4E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
15 GHz 4/8E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
15 GHz E3/16E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
18 GHz 2/4E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X
18 GHz 4/8E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
18 GHz E3/16E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
23 GHz 2/4E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
23 GHz 4/8E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
23 GHz E3/16E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
26 GHz 2/4E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
26 GHz 4/8E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
26 GHz E3/16E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
38 GHz 2/4E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
38 GHz 4/8E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
38 GHz E3/16E1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

C–2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Intended Use of Equipment for European Union

0678
Declaration of Conformity

I hereby declare that the product:


XP4
(Name of product, type or model, batch or serial number)

satisfies all of the technical regulations applicable to the product within the scope of Council
Directives 73/23/EEC, 89/336/EEC and 99/5/EC:
XP4 13GHz - 2E1/4E1, 4E1/8E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 301 128, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4 15GHz - 2E1/ 4E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 301 128, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4 18GHz - 2E1/4E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 301 128, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4 23GHz - 2E1/4E1, 4E1/8E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 300 198, ETS 300 385, EN 60950. C
XP4 38GHz - 2E1/4E1, 4E1/8E1, 16E/E3 -EN 300 197, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4plus 7/8GHz - 2E1/4E1, 4E1/8E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 301 216, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4plus 13GHz - 2E1/4E1, 4E1/8E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 301 128, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4plus 15GHz - 2E1/4E1, 4E1/ 8E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 301 128, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4plus 18GHz - 2E1/4E1, 4E1/8E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 301 128, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4plus 23GHz - 2E1/4E1, 4E1/8E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 300 198, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4plus 26GHz - 2E1/ 4E1, 4E1/8E1, 16E1/E3 - ETS 300 431, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
XP4plus 38GHz - 2E1/ 4E1, 4E1/8E1, 16E1/E3 - EN 300 197, ETS 300 385, EN 60950.
(Title(s) of regulations, standards, etc.)
All essential radio test suites have been carried out.
NOTIFIED BODY: EMCCert DR. Rasek
Address:
Boelwiese 5
91320 Embermannstadt
Germany
(Notified body: 0678)
MANUFACTURER or AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVE:
Address:
Stratex Networks
170 Rose Orchard Way
San Jose
CA 95134
USA

This declaration is issued under the sole responsibility of the manufacturer and, if
applicable, his authorised representative.
Point of contact:
Keri Holmboe, +1 408 943 0777 (Tel), +1 408 944 1678 (Fax)
(Name, telephone and fax number)

San Jose, 22 May, 2002


(Place, date of issue) (Signature)
KERI HOLMBOE, PRODUCT MANAGER
(Name and title in block letters)

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 C–3


R&TTE Directive 99/5/EC

C–4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
1+1 protected system. Two ODUs and two IDUs are used at each end of a link to protect against
transmission failure. If a data transmission fails on the operating ODU/IDU, it is transferred to the backup
ODU/IDU.
analog-to-digital converter (ADC). A device that converts an analog signal to a digital signal that
represents equivalent information.
automatic gain control (AGC) voltage. A process that automatically adjusts gain as a function of a
specified parameter, such as received signal level.
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). The code generated by a regenerator upon loss of input signal or loss of
frame. To prevent generation on unnecessary alarms, the line AIS signal will maintain operation of the
downstream regenerators.
alternate mark inversion (AMI) signal. A pseudoternary signal, representing binary digits. Successive
marks are of alternately positive and negative polarity and the absolute values of their amplitudes are
normally equal. Spaces are of zero amplitude.
analog signal. A signal that has a continuous nature as opposed to pulsed or discrete. XP4 Plus radios
convert analog signals to digital before sending them to customer equipment.
Auxiliary Data Channel. Channel that allows XP4 Plus terminals in a link to communicate system
information between themselves without using customer tributaries. Front Access 2x/4x, 4x/8x, E3/16EA,
and DS-3 systems come equipped with two 72 kbit/s overhead channels. An option card is required to
provide auxiliary data channels for 2x/4x rear access systems.
B3ZS. Binary 3 zeros substitution. This method of encoding transmissions is the factory default setting for
DS-3 XP4 Plus radios. A “1” is substituted for every 3 zeros.
B8ZS. Binary 8 zeros substitution. This method of encoding transmissions is the factory default setting for
DS-1 XP4 Plus radios.
BER. bit error ratio. The number of erroneous bits divided by the total number of bits transmitted, received,
or processed over some stipulated period.
Bose-Chaudhuri-Hochquenghem (BCH) code. A multilevel, cyclic, error-correcting, variable-length
digital code used to correct errors up to approximately 25% of the total number of digits.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Glossary 1


BNC

BNC. Connector for small data streams.


CLEC. Competitive Local Exchange Carrier market.
CSDS. Customer Specific Data Sheet. The worksheet used at the factory to configure XP4 Plus radios
before they are delivered to the customer. This worksheet specifies the exact radio configuration (capacity,
frequency band, options, etc) that was ordered by the customer.
dBm. dB referenced to one milliwatt. Used as a measure of absolute power values. For XP4 Plus radios,
alignment of antennas is achieved by measuring the RSL (Received Signal Level) in dBms.
Direct current (DC). XP4 Plus radios operate on DC (battery) power. AC/DC power converters are
available as options from Stratex Networks.
digital signal (DS). A signal in which discrete steps are used to represent information.
Diplexer. Device that allows two transmitters to use the same antenna, even if they don’t use the same
frequency. The diplexer in an XP4 Plus ODU couples the unit’s receive and transmit functions to the same
antenna.
digital signal 1 (DS-1). A digital signaling rate of 1.544 Mb/s, corresponding to the North American and
Japanese T1 designator.
DS-3. A digital signal rate of 44.736 Mb/s, corresponding to the North American T3 designator. A digital
signaling rate of 32.064 Mb/s, corresponding to the Japanese T3 designator.
Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA). A 32-bit bus standard that supports the features of
microchannel architecture. A special card is required for 32-bit operations that maintain compatibility with
the older ISA (Industry Standard Architecture).
Electromagnetic Spectrum. Though the electromagnetic spectrum was, by custom and practice, formerly
divided into 26 alphabetically designated bands, the ITU formally recognizes 12 bands, from 30 Hz to 3000
GHz.
EMI. Abbreviation for electromagnetic interference.
ESD. Abbreviation for electrostatic discharge.
ETSI. Technical Standards. International technical standards for wireless radios. XP4 Plus radios are in
compliance with all ETSI standards.
Forward Error Correction (FEC). In data transmission, a system of error control for data transmission
where the receiving device any character or code block that contains fewer than a predetermined number of
symbols and corrects them by adding bits using a predetermined algorithm. XP4 Plus 2x/4x and 4x/8x radios
are capable of correcting 2 bits in a 512 bit block. DS-3 and E3/16E1 XP4 Plus radios are capable of
correcting 8 bytes in a frame of 255 bytes.
frequency-shift keying (FSK). the modulating signal shifts the output frequency between predetermined
values.
GHz. Gigahertz. XP4 Plus ODUs are available to serve bands starting at 7/8 GHz up to 39.5 GHz.
High Density Bipolar Order 3 (HDB3). The factory default method of encoding transmissions for E1 and
E3 XP4 Plus radios. Substitutes a 1 for every 3 zeros.

Glossary 2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Network Management Interface (NMI)

Hitless Receive Switching. A protected system configuration. The online radio and the off-line radio each
have their own antenna, separated by a specific distance to avoid interference. Each antenna receives the
signal transmitted from the online radio at the other end of the link. If a fault occurs in the receiving end of
the link, the traffic is switched to the standby radio without causing errors (hitless receive switching).
HSB. Hot-Standby protection mode.
ITU. A civil international organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a
worldwide basis.
IDU. Indoor Unit. The indoor unit (IDU) is the control center of an XP4 Plus radio system. It interfaces
between the customer signals and the ODU. It is located in a protected environment.
IF. intermediate frequency. A frequency to which a carrier frequency is shifted as an intermediate step in
transmission or reception.
Light Emitting Diode (LED). Indicator lights on the IDU’s front panel that give operating status and alarm
information.
LINK. A link is a pair of IDUs (indoor units), ODUs (outdoor units) and an antenna.
LinkView. The software package that serves as a link manager for the system. LinkView gives user
enhanced configuration and diagnostic options over those available from the IDU’s (indoor unit) front panel.
Local. The IDU (indoor unit) or ODU (outdoor unit) that communicates with the remote radio is referred to
as the local unit. This unit is also often referred to as the “customer premise” unit.
Loopback. A diagnostic radio function that tests the working condition of system components by routing
traffic back in the direction it came from. Service is interrupted when loopbacks are performed.
MHz. Megahertz = 1 million hertz. A measure of a unit’s processing power.
Management Information System (MIS). An organized assembly of resources that collects, processes,
and distributes data.
Microwave Monolithic Integrated Circuit (MMIC). The integrated design of the ODU incorporates
MMIC technology.
Modulator/demodulator. A device used to convert digital signals into quasi-analog signals suitable for
transmission over analog communications channels and/or recover digital signals from quasi-analog signals.
multiplex switching unit (MSU). A separate hardware unit used only with E3 systems. Instead of using
one large 34 Mbps pipe to carry data, the MSU converts the system into 16 E1 connections. Customers who
need E3 capacity but don’t have compatible equipment can meet their needs by adding an MSU. The MSU is
also used for protected E3 systems.
Multiplex. To send two or more signals over the same channel.
Mute. Mute the remote radio to stop it from transmitting.
Network Management Interface (NMI). NMI option cards are available for every XP4 Plus radio
configuration. The cards are installed into the IDU to provide SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) capability for management of radio systems. The cards can also accommodate other network
management protocols besides SNMP.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Glossary 3


ODU

ODU. The outdoor unit (ODU interfaces between the IDU and the remote ODU through an antenna. The
ODU is generally placed on a pole, and is open to environmental disturbances.
Oscillator. An electronic circuit designed to produce an ideally stable alternating voltage or current.
OV Power. Ground power.
pulse-code modulation (PCM) . Modulation in which a signal is sampled, quantized and then digitized
for transmission over a common transmission medium.
Personal Communications Service (PCS). A set of capabilities that provides a combination of terminal
mobility, personal mobility, and service profile management.
Protection Switch. A separate hardware unit that provides protection against service interruptions by
connecting two IDUs at one end of a link. When an alarm occurs on the primary IDU (the one carrying
traffic), the protection switch reroutes traffic to the backup unit.
ProVision. Optional software program for configuring and maintaining large customer networks through a
single PC. Available only from Stratex Networks.
phase-locked loop (PLL) . A circuit that controls an oscillator so that it maintains a constant phase angle
relative to a reference signal.
Public switched telephone network (PSTN).

Remote. The IDU (indoor unit) or ODU (outdoor) unit that communicates with the local radio is termed
remote.
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). XP4 Plus radios comply with all regulations that limit the amount
of RFI that “leaks” or escapes from the casing.
Received signal level (RSL). The signal level at a receiver input terminal. The RSL is usually expressed
in dB with respect to 1 milliwat equals 0 dBm.
Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI).

RX. Receive.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Standard protocol used to manage and control IP
gateways and the networks to which they are attached. For XP4 Plus 2x/4x rear access systems, an option
card must be purchased to provide network management capabilities. All other XP4 Plus radio systems,
including front access 2x/4x systems, come standard with SNMP capability.
Switch unit (SU). Also known as a a protection switch. This is a separate hardware unit that provides
protection against service interruptions by connecting two IDUs at one end of a link. When an alarm occurs
on the primary IDU (the one carrying traffic), the protection switch reroutes traffic to the backup unit. (see
also, MSU).
Tombstone. A database stored in the nonvolatile memory that contains the radio configuration parameters.
T-R Spacing. The amount of tuning space in MHz between transmit and receive functions for XP4 Plus
radios. Though tuning frequencies for both Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive) functions can be changed in the
field, the spacing between them can not. It is preset at the Stratex Networks factory at a ratio that prevents
interference between the two functions.
TX. Transmit.

Glossary 4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


VT100

Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO). An electronic circuit designed to produce an ideally stable
alternating voltage.
Volts Direct Current (VDC). The external power supply requirement for XP4 Plus ODUs is +/- 21.6 to +/-
72 VDC.
VGA. Video graphics array. A display standard for IBM PCs.
VT100. port on the IDU for making a connection to the NMI card.

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Glossary 5


VT100

Glossary 6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
..
.
Numerics 2x/4x/8x capacities 8-4, 8-6, 8-25
16E1 capacity 2-22, 8-2, 8-5, 8-7, 8-21, 8-25 switching conditions for 3-15
and protection modes 3-7 4x/8x capacities 3-2, 8-9
and traffic capacity 4-12 and protection modes 3-7
BER/Mode display 4-12 Auxiliary Data Channel connectors 6-7
changing link ID code for 4-16 changing the link ID for 3-11, 4-16
changing transmit frequency for 4-14 FEC circuitry 8-10
connecting a DB25 cable 3-2 IDU connectors 2-7, 3-3
connecting a DB25 cable to 3-2 protection switch unit installation kit 1-7
converting to from E3 2-9 8DS-1 capacity 8-2
FEC circuitry 8-10
IDU connectors 2-28, 3-3 A
IDU/MSU connectors 2-9 access levels for LinkView 4-2
installing an MSU 2-9 activating
Mux/switching unit installation kit 1-8 ATPC 6-2
non-protected components 1-3 loopbacks 7-11
protected components of 1-4 MSU loopbacks 7-28
protected systems 1-8 SU remote loopbacks 7-26
space requirments 2-5 tributary loopbacks 7-20
switching conditions for 3-16 adapter
tirbutary connections 2-8 antenna waveguide 1-7
transmit/receive switches 3-8 brackets 2-15, 2-16, 2-19
2x/4x capacities 8-9 N-type 2-6, 2-8, 2-24
and protection modes 3-7 waveguide 2-4
Auxiliary Data Channel connectors 6-7 addresses
changing the link ID code for 4-16 Ethernet 5-7
changing the link ID for 3-11 IP 5-7, 5-8
FEC circuitry 8-10 router IP 5-7, 5-8
IDU connectors 2-7, 3-2 trap destination IP 5-7, 5-8
protection switch unit installation kit 1-7 AGC voltage measurement 3-17
upgrading to 4x/8x 4-12 alarm

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Index 1


B

conditions 3-15, 7-3 description of 6-1, 8-28


input sensors 3-4, 8-10 option 8-28
LEDs 4-6, 7-1 Auxiliary Data Channels 3-4
messages 7-1 connectors 6-7
status 3-7 description of 6-7, 8-28
threshold 7-6 option 8-28
alarm relays pinouts 6-7
external 6-13, 8-32 azimuth adjustment 3-18
outputs 1-11, 6-13, 8-10
alarms B
and display codes 4-10 balanced systems 1-7, 2-8, 2-25, 3-2, 6-8, 8-9
BER 7-6 data channels 6-7, 8-28
BER early warning 7-6 DB25 connections 8-22, 8-25
combination of 7-2 baud rate 5-5, 5-8
descriptions of 7-6 Belden cable 1-13, 1-14
discrete 7-6 BER
LOS 4-17 alarms 3-16, 4-7, 4-10, 7-6, 7-10, 7-32
scrolling through 7-1 early warning alarm 7-6, 7-10
aligning antennas 3-17 exceeding alarm threshold 7-4, 7-6
alignment aids 3-17 exceeding early warning threshold 7-6
and AGC voltage measurement 3-17 feature, accessing 4-1, 4-3
and received signal level (RSL) 3-17 thresholds 7-3
with ODU 3-17 BER/CAPACITY LED 4-11, 4-12
Andrew cables 1-13 BER/MODE
antennas 8-3 LED 4-12
adjusting azimuth and elevation settings 3-18 viewing 4-7
aligning with ODU 3-17 bit error rateSee BER.<Default Font>
alignment 3-1, 3-17, 8-12 BNC
and AGC voltage measurement 3-17 cable 2-9, 3-1, 3-2
and received signal level (RSL) 3-17 connector 3-17
and waveguide coupler 8-20 traffic interface 8-25
attaching to ODU 2-1, 2-3, 2-23, 8-12, 8-20 voltage, to calculate RSL 3-19
checking alignment 7-3, 7-4 weatherproof cap 3-18, 3-19
circular interface 2-22
cleaning 2-15 C
direct mounting 1-20
dual 2-22, 3-14, 8-23, 8-24 cable
elevation adjustment 3-19 connectors 1-4
installing 1-20, 2-3, 2-4, 2-23, 3-17 16E1 2-28
installing the direct-mount coupler to 2-15 DB15 1-11
interface options 1-20 N-type 1-12
ODU mounting options 2-13 weatherproofing 1-15
size 1-20 length of 4-17
spatial separation 3-9 testing 7-34
waveguide adapter 1-7 cable fault 3-16
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) cable ties 2-3, 2-5, 2-8, 2-16, 2-20
activating 6-2 cables
de-activating 6-2 See also coaxial cable

Index 2 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


C

100Base-T 6-3 PIN with LinkView 6-2


75 Ohm coaxial 6-3 the channel plan 4-13
Belden 1-14 the link ID code 3-11, 4-16
BNC 2-9, 3-2 for 2x/4x capacities 4-16
checking connections 7-3 for 4x/8x capacities 4-16
checking for damage in 7-34 for E3, DS-3, and 16E1 capacities 4-16
connecting 3-5 for offline radios 4-16
copper 1-11 manually 3-11
DB25 3-2, 5-12, 5-13 transmit frequency 4-14
DB9 2-9, 5-11 transmit power 4-15, 6-2
disconnecting 3-5 tributary configurations 4-17
earthing 1-11 channel plans
LMR400 1-14 changing 4-13
maintenance of 7-34 changing with LinkView 4-12
null vs. straight 4-5, 7-32 defaults 4-12
PVC insulated 1-11 using an alternate 4-12
ribbon 5-3 viewing 4-11, 4-12
RJ-45 interface 5-10 coaxial cable 1-4, 1-11, 1-12, 8-3
RS232 5-4, 5-12 See also cables
RS422 5-13, 6-9 and connectors 1-4
shorted or open circuit 7-3 Andrew 1-13
SNMP interface 5-10 Belden 1-13
straight serial cable 4-5 connecting IDU to ODU 8-12
tributary data signal 2-8 installing 1-11, 1-12
using with LinkView 4-5 required length 1-12
VT100 interface 5-11 terminating 1-12, 1-14, 2-5, 2-24
Y ribbon 5-2 commissioning
capacities 8-9 as part of a link 3-1
16E1 1-8, 8-2, 8-5, 8-7, 8-10, 8-21, 8-25 in Dual Link protection mode 3-13
2x/4x 2-7, 6-7, 8-9, 8-10 in Frequency Diversity protection mode 3-11
2x/4x/8x 8-4, 8-6, 8-25 in Hot Standby protection mode 3-10
4x/8x 2-7, 6-7, 8-9, 8-10 in Space Diversity protection mode 3-14
8DS-1 8-2 non-protected systems 3-1
DS-3 8-2, 8-9, 8-10, 8-21 protected systems 3-7
E1/DS-1 8-4, 8-6 the XP4 3-1
E3 6-7, 8-2, 8-9, 8-10, 8-21, 8-25 configuration settings 1-3
E3/DS-3 1-8, 2-7, 8-5, 8-6 changing 4-9
capacity viewing 4-9
mismatched 7-5 configurations
power 8-13 non-protected 8-4, 8-5
setting the same for both terminals 7-5 protected 8-6, 8-7
upgrades 8-2 configuring
changing accessories 6-1
channel plans with LinkView 4-12 alarm relays with LinkView 6-14
configuration settings 4-9 local terminal 8-18
frequencies 3-11 loopback paths with LinkView 7-10
link ID code with LinkView 7-2 new tributary 7-4
log-in PIN 3-11, 4-9 options 6-1
PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Index 3
D

radio terminals in a network 5-1 D


remote terminal 8-18 data channels 3-4, 8-28
SNMP with LinkView 5-4 data rates 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-10
the EIU 6-5 DB15 connectors 1-11, 2-8, 6-13
the link ID code 4-15 DB25
the Network Order Wire 6-10 cable 3-2
the NMI option 5-4 connections 8-25
the XP4 3-5, 4-1, 8-19 balanced 8-22
traffic capacity 4-11 to RJ45 2-11
transmit frequency 4-13 to wirewrap 2-12
transmit power 4-15 unbalanced 8-22
with LinkView 4-1, 8-18 connectors 3-13, 5-12
with the front panel keypad 4-1, 8-18 interface 8-25
connections pinouts 2-10, 2-25
checking cable 7-3 DB9
checking tributary 7-4 cable 2-9, 5-11
grounding 7-34 connector 5-11, 5-13, 7-34, 8-19
waveguide 2-22 DC input range 8-8
connectors DC power 2-8
16E1 2-9 de-activating ATPC 6-2
Auxiliary Data Channels 6-7 default PIN 6-2
cable 1-4, 1-11, 1-12 diplexers 8-13, 8-15
DB15 2-8, 6-13 direct-mount coupler
DB25 5-12 installing 2-14
DB9 5-11, 5-13, 7-34 installing to antenna 2-15
IDU 2-7, 3-2, 3-3 direct-mount ODU 2-1
IDU/MSU 3-3 display codes 4-10
Network Order Wire 6-9 display window, IDU 4-8
N-type 3-5 DS-3 capacity 8-2, 8-9, 8-21
RJ-45 5-9, 7-32 and protection modes 3-7
Weidmuller 2-8 and traffic capacity 4-12
control keys 4-7 Auxiliary Data Channel connectors 6-7
Enter 4-8 BER/Mode display 4-12
Select 4-8 changing link ID code for 4-16
View 4-7 changing transmit frequency for 4-14
converting to 16E1 from E3 2-9 FEC circuitry 8-10
copper cable 1-11 tributary configuration setting 4-16
corrosion, checking for 7-34 dual antennas 2-22, 3-14, 8-23, 8-24
couplers Dual Link protection mode 3-8, 3-9, 8-22, 8-25
direct-mount 2-14 commissioning in 3-13
power losses 2-22 setting frequencies 3-13
remote mount 2-18 dual ODUs 2-22, 3-14, 8-23, 8-24
waveguide 2-22 direct-mount coupler/splitter installation kit 1-9
crimp tools 1-12 remote mount coupler/splitter installation kit 1-
customer data, loss of 4-11 9

Index 4 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


F

E using LinkView to configure 6-14


E1/DS-1 capacities 8-4, 8-6
E3 capacity 8-2, 8-9, 8-21 F
and protection modes 3-7 fault detection 8-21, 8-22
and the protection switch 8-25 features
and traffic capacity 4-12 of IDU 8-8
Auxiliary Data Channel connectors 6-7 of LinkView 4-1
BER/Mode display 4-12 of ODU 8-12
changing link ID code for 4-16 of the IDU front panel 4-1
changing transmit frequency for 4-14 of XP4 8-1
converting to 16E1 2-9, 8-9, 8-25 flammability iii
FEC circuitry 8-10 flanges
tributary configuration setting 4-16 UBR/PBR 2-22
E3/DS-3 capacities 3-2, 8-5, 8-6 waveguide 2-4, 2-21
changing link ID for 3-11 flex waveguide 1-7, 2-4, 2-21
IDU connectors 2-7, 3-3 Forward Error Correction (FEC)
protected systems 1-8 circuitry 8-10
protection switch unit installation kit 1-8 frame loss 3-16
switching conditions for 3-16 frame synchronization 7-4
transmit/receive switches 3-8 frequencies 8-2, 8-3, 8-12, 8-22
earthing cable 1-11 and protection modes 8-22
electromagnetic fields 3-2 changing 3-11
electrostatic discharge 7-34 receive 8-18
elevation adjustment 3-19 setting both terminals to same 7-4
Engineering Order Wire (EOW) handset setting in Dual Link protection mode 3-13
description of 6-12 setting in Frequency Diversity protection mode
installing 6-13 3-12
entering a PIN 6-2 transmit 8-18
equipment using different 3-9
damage to 1-2 frequency bands 1-3, 1-20, 8-4
faulty 7-34 Frequency Diversity protection mode 3-7, 3-9, 8-
labels 1-1 22, 8-25
part number labels 1-4 commissioning in 3-11
required 1-10 setting frequencies 3-12
unpacking 1-1 frequency plans 3-5, 8-7
establishing a link 8-3 changing 4-12
Ethernet implementing 8-13
address 5-7 frequency ranges 8-13
port 5-7, 5-11 front panel 2-6, 6-7, 7-2
Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) alarm LEDs 4-6
configurations 6-5 alarm relay connectors 6-13
description of 6-2, 8-29 and system monitoring 7-34
installation kit 6-3 and terminal configuration 7-34
installing 6-4 and troubleshooting 7-1
self-test 6-4 connectors 3-3, 8-10
shelf assembly 6-4 control keys 4-7
external alarm relays 6-13, 8-32 DB15 connector 2-8

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Index 5


G

display window 4-8 establishing frequency plan 8-13


freezing with LinkView 3-8 features of 8-8
key features of 4-1 front panel 2-6, 2-8, 4-1, 6-7, 6-9, 6-13, 7-1,
keypad 8-7, 8-18, 8-19 7-2
keypad controls and LEDs 4-5 display window 4-8
LEDs 4-8 keypad 8-18
Network Order Wire connections 6-9 grounding the 1-11, 1-22, 2-24
using to configure the XP4 4-1 installation kit 1-2, 1-6
fuses, replacing 3-4 installing
non-protected 2-5
G protected 2-24
ground lugs 1-11, 6-4 logging in to 4-9
grounding loopbacks
connections 7-34 digital 7-18
studs 1-11, 1-24, 1-25, 2-21 E3/DS-3 7-18, 7-19
the IDU 1-11, 1-22, 2-24 loss of power 7-3
the ODU 1-11, 1-24, 2-5, 2-21, 2-23 main functions of 8-7
the XP4 1-21 memory backup 8-10
waveguide connections 2-22 offline 3-11
with a wrist strap 7-34 online 3-11
part number label location 1-5
H power connector 2-8
powering the 1-11, 3-2, 3-4
hazardous materials iii replacing 7-4
health and safety practices iii selecting capacity power 8-13
hitless switching 3-9, 3-16, 8-21, 8-22 selecting transmit power 8-13
HiUncal error message 7-31 software 3-4
Hot Standby protection mode 1-9, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3- space requirements for 2-5
10, 8-21, 8-22, 8-25 speed keys 8-18
HSB mounts 2-17 storing frequency plans 8-7
transmit failure 7-4
I using plug-in cards with 8-10
IDU 8-3 ventilation of 2-5, 2-24
alarm input sensors 8-10 input sensors 1-11
alarm relay outputs 8-10 inspection of the XP4 Plus 7-34
aligning antenna with 3-17 installation kits 1-6
and Forward Error Correction (FEC) 8-10 dual ODU direct-mount coupler/splitter 1-9
and rack mount compatibility 8-9 Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) 6-3
balanced/unbalanced 8-9 IDU 1-2, 1-6
block diagram of 8-10 Mux/switching unit
cable shorted 7-3 16E1 1-8
capacities 8-2, 8-9 ODU 1-2, 1-6, 1-15
configuring 1-3 protection switch unit 1-7
with front panel keypad 8-7 2x/4x 1-7
with LinkView 8-7 4x/8x 1-7
connecting to the ODU 1-12 E3/DS-3 1-8
connectors 2-7, 3-2, 3-3 remote mount 1-6, 1-9
converting to 16E1 8-9 installing 1-12

Index 6 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


L

a direct-mount ODU 2-1 remote 4-8


a multiplexer switching unit (MSU) 2-9 RSL/ALM 4-10
a non-protected IDU 2-5 length, coaxial cable 1-12
a non-protected ODU 2-1 link fade 7-6
a protected IDU 2-24 major 7-4
a protected ODU 2-13 minor 7-3
a remote or separated ODU 2-4 link ID code
accessories 6-1 changing 4-16
alarm relay wiring 2-8 for 2x/4x capacities 3-11
antennas 3-17 for 4x/8x capacities 3-11
coaxial cable 1-11, 1-12 for a protected system 3-11
front-access NMI 5-2 for E3, DS-3, and 16E1 capacities 3-11, 4-
NMI option card 5-2 16
non-protected systems 2-1 for offline radios 4-16
ODUs 3-2 manually 3-11
options 6-1 configuring 4-15
protected systems 2-1 mismatch 7-4
rear-access NMI 5-4 setting all radios to same 7-2
the antenna 1-20, 2-3, 2-4 setting same for both terminals 7-4
the direct-mount coupler 2-14 viewing 4-15
the direct-mount coupler to antenna 2-15 link path
the Engineering Order Wire (EOW) handset 6- checking for obstructions 7-3, 7-4
13 LinkView software 7-6, 8-7, 8-18, 8-19
the Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU) 6-4 access levels 4-2
the Network Order Wire 6-9 accessing 7-32
the remote mount coupler 2-18 and configuring the XP4 4-1
tributary data signal cables 2-8 and the RS232 interface 8-19
insulated cable 1-11 changing channel plans with 4-12
insulated wire 1-11 changing link ID code with 7-2
interface, circular 2-22 changing PIN with 3-11, 6-2
interference 4-14, 7-6, 8-29 configuring alarm relays with 6-14
checking for 7-3, 7-4, 7-6, 7-32 configuring loopback paths with 7-10
preventing 3-8, 3-9, 4-15, 7-16, 8-22 configuring SNMP with 5-4
IP address 5-7, 5-8 description of 4-2
editing frequency plans with 8-7
K freezing the front panel with 3-8
keypad controls, front panel 4-5 IDU port 4-8, 4-9
key features 4-1
L monitor logs 7-1
Operator’s Manual 8-19
LEDs 4-6 ordering 4-5
alarm 4-6 running loopbacks with 7-1
BER/CAPACITY 4-11 storing XP4 data 8-19
BER/Mode 4-12 using a password with 8-7
Computer in Use 4-8 using loopback function 7-6
front panel 4-5 using the appropriate cable with 4-5
Local 4-8 LMR400 cable 1-14
Logged In 4-8 local MSU E3 loopback 7-28, 7-30
PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Index 7
M

local terminal mounting options, ODU 2-13


changing configuration of 8-18 to one antenna with direct mounts 2-14
local tributary loopbacks 7-20, 7-22 to one antenna with remote mounts 2-18
logging in 3-5 to single antenna with old-style mount 2-21
entering a PIN 4-9 to two antennas 2-22
for the first time 4-9 MSU loopbacks 7-28
to the IDU 4-9 local E3 7-28, 7-30
logging out 4-18 remote E1 7-28
loopbacks multiplexer switching unit (MSU) 8-9, 8-25
activating 7-11 connectors 3-3
activating MSU 7-28 installing 2-9
activating SU remote 7-26 space requirements for 2-5
and troubleshooting the XP4 7-1 multiplexing 8-10
configuring with LinkView 7-10 muting 3-8, 8-22
IDU the transmitter 4-15, 7-4
digital 7-18 Mux/switching unit installation kit, 16E1 1-8
E3/DS-3l 7-18, 7-19
MSU N
local E3 7-28, 7-30 Network Management Interface (NMI) 3-4
remote E1 7-28 card 7-34, 8-25
ODU configuring 5-4
analog 7-12 connectors 5-9
digital 7-12, 7-14 installing
RF 7-12, 7-16 front-access 5-2
tributary rear-access 5-4
activating 7-20 installing option card 5-2
local 7-20, 7-22 interface 5-1
remote 7-20, 7-24 option 5-1, 8-10, 8-25
running on protected systems 7-26 ordering 8-28
using to troubleshoot 7-6 plug-in module 5-1, 8-25
LOS alarm 4-17 resetting 5-6
loss of Network Management System (NMS) 5-1
downlink signal 7-3 Network Order Wire
power to IDU 7-3 configurations 6-10
tributary input signal 7-4 description of 6-9, 8-30
LoUncal error message 7-31 installing 6-9
lugs, ground 1-11 making a call 6-11
programming a site identification number 6-11
M volume controls 6-12
maintaining non-protected
cables 7-34 components 1-3
the XP4 7-34, 8-19, 8-25 IDU 2-5
management port 5-8 ODU 2-1
masks, subnet 5-7 systems 2-22
memory backup 8-10 commissioning 3-1
MIB browsers 5-2 installing 2-1
modem type 5-8 non-protected configurations 8-4

Index 8 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


P

16xE1 capacity 8-5 replacing 3-2, 7-4


2x/4x/8x capacities 8-4 offline IDU 3-11
antenna interface option 1-20 offline ODU 3-11
E1/DS-3 capacities 8-4 online IDU 3-11
E3/DS-3 capacity 8-5 options
N-type Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) 8-
adapter 2-6, 2-8, 2-24 28
cable connectors 1-12, 3-5 Auxiliary Data Channel 8-28
null modem cable 4-5, 7-32 for mounting a protected ODU 2-13
Network Management Interface 8-10
O output failure
ODU 8-2, 8-3, 8-12 ODU 7-4
aligning antenna with 3-17
attaching to antenna 2-1, 2-3, 2-23, 8-12, 8-20 P
BNC connector 3-17 painting the ODU 1-24
BNC weatherproof cap 3-18, 3-19 parameters, setting 3-5
cable shorted 7-3 part number labels 1-4
connecting to IDU 1-12, 8-12 IDU 1-5
diplexers 8-13 ODU 1-5
dual 2-22, 3-14, 8-23, 8-24 passwords
features of 8-12 configuring 4-2
frequency band 1-3 using with LinkView 4-3, 8-7
grounding requirements 1-11 path calculation 3-17
grounding the 1-24, 2-5, 2-21, 2-23 PIN
installation kit 1-2, 1-6, 1-9, 1-15 changing 3-11
installing 3-2 default 4-9, 6-2
direct-mount 2-1 entering 4-9, 6-2
non-protected 2-1 inputting 4-9
protected 2-13 using Linkview to change 6-2
remote or separated 2-4 pinouts
loopbacks Auxiliary Data Channels 6-7
analog 7-12 DB25 2-25
digital 7-12, 7-14 DB25 to BNC 2-10
RF 7-12, 7-16 power connector 2-8, 2-29
loss of downlink signal 7-3 VT100 5-4
mounting options 2-13, 2-26 plug-in cards 8-10
offline 3-11 polarization indicator 2-2, 2-4
operating requirements 8-13 ports
output failure 7-4 Com 4-5, 5-4, 5-5
painting the 1-24 data 6-3
part number label location 1-5 Ethernet 5-6, 5-7, 5-10, 5-11
polarization 2-23 Ethernet 10 Base-T 5-2
polarization indicator 2-2 LinkView 4-8, 4-9
port 2-6 NMI serial 5-13
powering the 3-4 ODU 2-6, 2-24, 2-26, 3-12, 3-15
remote mount 1-6 radio management 5-8
removing 8-12 RF 4-10

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Index 9


R

RJ-45 5-10, 6-3 selecting 3-7


RS232 8-31 Space Diversity 1-9, 3-7, 3-9, 8-22
RS422 8-30 protection switch unit 3-7, 3-8, 8-20, 8-21, 8-25
serial management 5-6, 5-7, 5-11, 5-12, 5-13 and DB25 interface 8-25
SNMP SLIP 5-2 installation kit 1-7
SNMP TERM 5-11 2x/4x 1-7
test 6-3 4x/8x 1-7
VT100 5-2, 5-4 E3/DS-3 1-8
XP4 Plus management 5-8 LED summary 3-9
power connector 2-8 space requirements 2-24
connecting to IDU 3-4 ProVision 5-1, 5-2
measuring the voltage 2-9, 2-29, 3-4 PVC
power loss 2-17, 2-22, 3-16 cable 1-11
power requirements 2-8 wire 1-11
powering up
and checking connections 3-2 R
for the first time 3-4 rack mounts 8-9
the IDU 3-2, 3-4 radio configuration sheet 3-11, 4-9, 4-13, 5-1
pressurizing waveguide connections 2-22 radio frequency (RF)
preventing accidental switching 3-8 burns from iii
protected exposure to 3-2
components 1-4 radiation from iii
IDU 2-24 rainfall
ODU 2-13 checking conditions 7-3, 7-4
protected configurations 8-6 triggering alarms 7-6
16xE1 capacity 8-7 receive frequencies 8-18
2x/4x/8x capacity 8-6 receive switches 3-8, 3-16
E1/DS-1 capacity 8-6 received signal level (RSL) 3-17, 8-28
E3/DS-3 capacities 8-6 and aligning antennas 3-17
protected systems 8-20 calculating from BNC voltage 3-19
16E1 capacity 1-8 discrepancies between measured and calculated
cable connections 2-28 3-19
changing link ID code for 3-11 remote mount
commissioning 3-7 connection requirements 1-11
E3/DS-3 capacities 1-8 coupler, installing 2-18
force switching 7-26 installation kit 1-6
installing 2-1 ODU 1-6, 2-4
running tributary loopbacks on 7-26 remote MSU E1 loopback 7-28
stacking 2-24 remote terminal
protection modes changing configuration of 8-18
and 16E1 capacity 3-7 checking transmitter output power 7-3, 7-4
and 2x/4x capacities 3-7 remote tributary loopbacks 7-20, 7-24
and 4x/8x capacities 3-7 removing the ODU 8-12
and E3/DS-3 capacities 3-7 replacing
Dual Link 3-8, 3-9, 8-22 IDU 7-4
Frequency Diversity 3-7, 3-9, 8-22 ODU 3-2, 7-4
Hot Standby 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 8-21 ribbon cable 5-3
rocker switch 3-7

Index 10 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


T

RJ-45 required configuration 2-22


cable 5-10 speed keys 8-18
connectors 5-9, 7-32 standby radios 3-9, 8-20, 8-21, 8-22
ports 5-10, 6-3 storing XP4 data 8-19
rocker switch 3-7 studs, grounding 1-11, 1-24, 1-25, 2-21
router SU remote loopbacks 7-26
IP address 5-7, 5-8 subnet mask 5-7, 5-8
subnet mask 5-7, 5-8 switch activation 3-15
RS232 switching conditions
cable 5-4, 5-12 for 16E1 system 3-16
interface 8-19 for 2x/4x/8x systems 3-15
port 8-31 for E3/DS-3 systems 3-16
RS422 switching protected systems 7-26
cable 5-13, 6-9 switching terminals 3-7, 3-9
port 8-30 from primary to secondary 3-15
RSL alarm threshold 7-3, 7-4 preventing accidental 3-8
RSL/ALM LED system components 1-3
viewing 4-10 non-protected 1-3
protected 1-4
S system configuration 1-2
safety practices iii, 3-2 settings 1-3
safety standards iii verifying 1-3
selecting a protection mode 3-7
serial cable 4-5 T
serial management ports 5-7 technical support i, 7-33
setting temperatures iii
parameters for the XP4 3-5, 4-13 terminals
same link ID code for both terminals 7-4 setting same capacity for both 7-5
terminals to the same frequency 7-4 setting same link ID code for both 7-4
the same capacity for both terminals 7-5 terminating the coaxial cable 1-12, 1-14, 2-5, 2-24
signal generator 7-34 test points 7-34
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 8- testing 3-5
25 thresholds
and system monitoring 7-34 BER 7-3
and terminal configuration 7-34 RSL alarm 7-3
and the XP4 warranty 5-2 tools
and troubleshooting the XP4 7-1 crimp 1-12
card 5-2 required for commissioning 3-1
event logs 7-1 required for installation 1-10
interface cables 5-10 required for SNMP installation 5-2
plug-in module 5-2 torque table 2-18
security system 5-1 T-R spacing 1-3, 8-4
using to change link ID code 7-2 traffic capacity
slip-fit connection 1-20 and E3, 16E1, and DS-3 systems 4-12
Space Diversity protection mode 1-9, 3-7, 3-9, 8- configuring 4-11
22, 8-25 upgrading 4-12
commissioning in 3-14 viewing 4-11, 4-12

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Index 11


U

traffic interface troubleshooting


BNC 8-25 common problems 7-31
DB25 8-25 quick reference 7-3
transmit failure, IDU 7-4 the XP4 Plus 7-1
transmit frequency 8-18 using alarm LEDs 7-1
changing 4-14 using loopbacks 7-1
changing for E3, DS-3, and 16E1 capacities 4- using the RSL/Alarm display 7-1
14
changing for offline radios 4-14 U
configuring 4-13 unbalanced systems 1-7, 2-8, 2-25, 3-2, 6-7, 8-9
viewing 4-14 data channels 6-7, 8-28
transmit power 8-13 DB25 connections 8-22, 8-25
changing 4-15, 6-2 unmuting 8-22
configuring 4-15 upgrading
loss of 3-16 from 2x/4x to 4x/8x capacity 4-12
selecting from the IDU 8-13 traffic capacity 4-12
viewing 4-15 using loopback function 7-6
transmit signal, loss of 3-16
transmit switches 3-8, 3-16 V
transmitter
muted 7-4 ventilation 2-5, 2-24
muting 4-15 verifying system configuration 1-3
trap destination IP address 5-7, 5-8 viewing
trap generation 5-7, 5-8 configuration settings 4-9
tributaries RSL/ALM conditions 4-10
checking existing connections 7-4 the bit error rate (BER) 4-11, 4-12
configuring new 7-4 the channel plan 4-11, 4-12
detecting faults in 3-9 the link ID code 4-15
tributary cables 2-8 the transmit frequency 4-14
tributary configurations traffic capacity 4-11, 4-12
adjusting for cable length 4-17 transmit power 4-15
changing 4-17 tributary configurations 4-16
setting for DS-3 capacity 4-16 voltage
setting for E3 capacity 4-16 calibrating on the BNC 3-18
viewing 4-16 checking the 3-4
tributary connections 2-8 voltage range 1-13
DB25 to BNC pinouts 2-10 voltmeter 3-1, 3-18
DB25 to RJ45 2-11 VT100
DB25 to wirewrap 2-12 interface cable 5-11
tributary input pinout 5-4
loss of signal 7-4 reset function 5-6
tributary loopbacks using to configure SNMP 5-4
activating 7-20
local 7-20, 7-22 W
remote 7-20, 7-24 warranty for XP4 5-2
running on protected systems 7-26 waveguide 1-11, 1-20
tributary pinouts adapter for antennas 1-7, 2-4
DB25 2-25 assemblies 2-17, 2-22

Index 12 XP4 Plus Microwave Radio System User Manual


Y

coupler 2-22, 8-20 setting parameters for 3-5


flange 2-4 shipping container 1-1
flex 1-7, 2-4 storing data 8-19
waveguide assemblies system components 1-3
power loss 2-17 system configuration 1-2
waveguide connections troubleshooting 7-1
grounding 2-22 warranty 5-2
pressurizing 2-22 weatherproofing 7-34
weatherproofing 2-22
weatherproofing 1-15, 2-22, 7-34 Y
Weidmuller connector 2-8 Y ribbon cable 5-2
wire
PVC insulated 1-11
using to connect alarm relay outputs 1-11
using to connect equipment rack to station
ground bar 1-22
using to ground equipment rack to station
ground 1-11
using to ground IDU 1-11
using to ground ODU 1-11
using to ground the IDU 1-22, 2-5, 2-24
using to ground the ODU 1-24
using to ground tripod or mount 1-11
using to install the EIU 6-4
using to power the IDU 1-11, 2-8
wrist strap for grounding 7-34

X
XP4 Plus
architecture 8-2
commissioning 3-1
components 1-4, 8-3
configuring 1-3, 3-5, 4-1, 8-19
electrostatic discharge 7-34
equipment 7-34
establishing a link 8-3
features of 8-1
grounding 1-21
inspection of 7-34
installing 2-1
maintaining 7-34, 8-19, 8-25
non-protected configurations 8-4
power requirements 2-8
protected configurations 8-6
protected system 8-20
self-diagnostics 3-4
setting both terminals to the same frequency 7-4

PN 840-900201-008 Rev. 03 October 2002 Index 13

You might also like